Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Optimization

1,663 missions · 889 completed

Missions

Open774Completed889All1663
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Air Travel Demand and Airline Seat Inventory Management II: The EMSR Protection Level for Two Nested Fare ClassesTextbook

Why airlines protect seats

An airline sells the seats of one flight in several fare classes at different prices, all drawn from one shared cabin. Discount fares are bought early, under advance-purchase restrictions, while most high-fare requests arrive close to departure. Accepting every early low-fare request fills the aircraft with cheap passengers and turns away late high-fare passengers; refusing too many leaves seats empty. Seat inventory control decides how many seats to keep away from the low fare. Peter Belobaba's 1987 MIT thesis (Flight Transportation Laboratory Report R87-7) introduced the expected marginal seat revenue (EMSR) model for this decision, and EMSR-type rules remain the basis of the booking-limit logic in airline revenue management systems.

Timeline. Littlewood (1972, AGIFORS Symposium Proceedings; reprinted 2005) proposed accepting a low-fare request as long as its fare is at least the high fare times the probability of selling all remaining seats to high-fare passengers. Analysts at Trans World Airlines (1973) and Richter at Lufthansa (1982) gave equivalent formulations for the dynamic case. Belobaba (1987, Ch. 5) restated the two-class rule as a static protection level for nested inventories and extended it heuristically to many classes. Brumelle and McGill (Operations Research 41, 1993) and Curry (Transportation Science 24, 1990) later proved optimality of nested protection levels for any number of classes under low-to-high arrivals, and showed that Belobaba's multi-class EMSR levels are not optimal for three or more classes. This mission concerns only the two-class result, which is correct.

Setting

A single flight leg has capacity C∈NC \in \mathbb NC∈N. Class 1 has fare f1f_1f1​, class 2 has fare f2f_2f2​, with 0≤f2≤f10 \le f_2 \le f_10≤f2​≤f1​. The numbers of requests for the two classes are random variables r1,r2r_1, r_2r1​,r2​ with values in N\mathbb NN, defined on a probability space (Ω,μ)(\Omega, \mu)(Ω,μ) and independent. There are no cancellations, no no-shows, and a refused request is lost.

The inventory is nested: a class-1 request is accepted as long as any seat is unsold. A protection level S∈{0,…,C}S \in \{0, \dots, C\}S∈{0,…,C} is the number of seats reserved for class 1; it sets the class-2 booking limit BL2=C−SBL_2 = C - SBL2​=C−S. All class-2 requests arrive before any class-1 request. Class 2 therefore books min⁡(r2,C−S)\min(r_2, C - S)min(r2​,C−S) seats and class 1 books min⁡(r1,C−min⁡(r2,C−S))\min(r_1, C - \min(r_2, C-S))min(r1​,C−min(r2​,C−S)), and the realised revenue is

RS=f2min⁡(r2,C−S)+f1min⁡(r1, C−min⁡(r2,C−S)).R_S = f_2 \min(r_2, C - S) + f_1 \min\bigl(r_1,\, C - \min(r_2, C - S)\bigr).RS​=f2​min(r2​,C−S)+f1​min(r1​,C−min(r2​,C−S)).

The expected revenue is Rˉ(S)=E[RS]\bar R(S) = \mathbb E[R_S]Rˉ(S)=E[RS​].

The tail probability of class 1 is Pˉ1(S)=P[r1≥S]\bar P_1(S) = P[r_1 \ge S]Pˉ1​(S)=P[r1​≥S], the probability of receiving SSS or more class-1 requests, and the expected marginal seat revenue of the SSS-th class-1 seat is

EMSR1(S)=f1⋅Pˉ1(S).\mathrm{EMSR}_1(S) = f_1 \cdot \bar P_1(S).EMSR1​(S)=f1​⋅Pˉ1​(S).

For a single class with SSS seats the expected revenue is f1 E[min⁡(r1,S)]f_1\,\mathbb E[\min(r_1, S)]f1​E[min(r1​,S)], and EMSR1(S)\mathrm{EMSR}_1(S)EMSR1​(S) is its increment from S−1S-1S−1 to SSS seats. The EMSR protection level S21S_2^1S21​ is the largest integer S∈{0,…,C}S \in \{0, \dots, C\}S∈{0,…,C} with

EMSR1(S)≥f2.\mathrm{EMSR}_1(S) \ge f_2 .EMSR1​(S)≥f2​.

In Lean these objects are nestedRevenue, expectedNestedRevenue, tailProb, classRevenue, emsr and emsrProtectionLevel in SeatInventory.Nested.

Formalization targets

Goal: Eqs. (5.15)–(5.16), optimality of the EMSR protection level

Rˉ(S)≤Rˉ(S21)for all S∈{0,…,C}.\bar R(S) \le \bar R(S_2^1) \qquad \text{for all } S \in \{0, \dots, C\}.Rˉ(S)≤Rˉ(S21​)for all S∈{0,…,C}.

The goal fixes no distribution: it holds for every pair of independent N\mathbb NN-valued demands, and S21S_2^1S21​ depends only on f2/f1f_2/f_1f2​/f1​ and the law of r1r_1r1​.

Milestones

  1. Eq. (5.11). f1E[min⁡(r1,S)]−f1E[min⁡(r1,S−1)]=f1P[r1≥S]f_1\mathbb E[\min(r_1,S)] - f_1\mathbb E[\min(r_1,S-1)] = f_1 P[r_1 \ge S]f1​E[min(r1​,S)]−f1​E[min(r1​,S−1)]=f1​P[r1​≥S] for S≥1S \ge 1S≥1.
  2. Eqs. (6.1)–(6.2). Pˉ1\bar P_1Pˉ1​ and, for f1≥0f_1 \ge 0f1​≥0, EMSR1\mathrm{EMSR}_1EMSR1​ are non-increasing in SSS.
  3. Eq. (4.8), Littlewood's rule, already on the platform as RevenueManagement.littlewood_marginal_value (Talluri and van Ryzin's Eq. (2.1), proved).
  4. Sect. 5.2, p. 112. Rˉ(S)≤Rˉ(S21)\bar R(S) \le \bar R(S_2^1)Rˉ(S)≤Rˉ(S21​) for S21≤S≤CS_2^1 \le S \le CS21​≤S≤C: a smaller booking limit for class 2 cannot raise expected revenue.
  5. Sect. 5.2, p. 114. With the same class-2 limit C−SC - SC−S, the expected nested revenue is at least the expected revenue of two distinct inventories with SSS and C−SC - SC−S seats, strictly if f1>0f_1 > 0f1​>0 and P[r2<C−S, r1>S]>0P[r_2 < C - S,\ r_1 > S] > 0P[r2​<C−S, r1​>S]>0.

Significance

The two-class result says that, for a static booking limit set once before sales open and low-fare demand arriving first, the airline needs only the high-fare demand distribution and the fare ratio to set the optimal limit; the low-fare forecast is irrelevant. This is the rule that the thesis then applies class by class in multi-class nested systems, and it is the base case against which the later exact multi-class theory (Brumelle–McGill, Curry) is checked. Milestone 5 makes precise why nested inventories dominate the distinct-inventory allocation of the thesis's Sect. 5.1 with the same class-2 limit.

The result is classical and proved, in the sense that the optimality of a two-class threshold policy follows from Littlewood's argument and from the dynamic-programming treatment in Talluri and van Ryzin's The Theory and Practice of Revenue Management (2004, Ch. 2). On Prove2Me, Littlewood's marginal rule and the dynamic-programming optimality of nested protection levels (RevenueManagement.static_optimal_controls) are formalized, but in Bellman form: there the protection level is defined through the value function of a dynamic program. What is not formalized is the statement in Belobaba's form, where the protection level is the explicit threshold of f1P[r1≥S]f_1 P[r_1 \ge S]f1​P[r1​≥S] against f2f_2f2​ and the objective is the explicit expected revenue of a booking limit. Connecting the two forms, and the comparison with distinct inventories, is the work of this mission.

Difficulty

The expected revenue couples the two demands through the capacity left by class 2, so Rˉ\bar RRˉ is not a sum of single-class revenues and is not separately concave in an obvious way. The step that requires care is the increment Rˉ(S)−Rˉ(S−1)\bar R(S) - \bar R(S-1)Rˉ(S)−Rˉ(S−1): it is not EMSR1(S)−f2\mathrm{EMSR}_1(S) - f_2EMSR1​(S)−f2​, as the thesis's sentence after the milestone on p. 112 suggests, because the extra protected seat matters only on the event that class 2 would have reached its limit. Independence of r1r_1r1​ and r2r_2r2​ is what makes that event's probability factor out; without independence the threshold rule is not optimal. The discrete reading matters too: with P[r1>S]P[r_1 > S]P[r1​>S] in place of P[r1≥S]P[r_1 \ge S]P[r1​≥S] the rule is off by one seat and the claim fails.

Formalization scope

Conventions the Lean statements commit to:

  • Demands are N\mathbb NN-valued measurable random variables r₁ r₂ : Ω → ℕ on a probability space μ; the goal and milestone 4 assume IndepFun r₁ r₂ μ. The thesis writes continuous densities (Eqs. (5.1)–(5.5)) but requires integer seat counts; the discrete model is used throughout.
  • Pˉ1(S)=P[r1≥S]\bar P_1(S) = P[r_1 \ge S]Pˉ1​(S)=P[r1​≥S], as in Eq. (6.2) and the prose of Eq. (5.11), not P[r1>S]P[r_1 > S]P[r1​>S] as in Eq. (5.2).
  • The EMSR protection level is the largest S∈{0,…,C}S \in \{0,\dots,C\}S∈{0,…,C} with f1P[r1≥S]≥f2f_1 P[r_1 \ge S] \ge f_2f1​P[r1​≥S]≥f2​ (Eq. (5.15)); Eq. (5.16)'s equality is the continuous idealisation and is not stated.
  • Booking order: all class-2 requests precede all class-1 requests (pp. 108, 112). This order is built into the revenue formula, not assumed separately.
  • Fares satisfy 0≤f2≤f10 \le f_2 \le f_10≤f2​≤f1​; the thesis has f1>f2f_1 > f_2f1​>f2​, and the statements also cover equality.
  • Expectations are Bochner integrals of bounded revenues, probabilities are μ.real; seat counts use truncated subtraction only where S≤CS \le CS≤C.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: S21S_2^1S21​ is defined by the threshold of (5.15), never as an argmax of expected revenue, and the expected revenue is computed from the realised revenue of the booking process, not postulated as a sum of marginal terms.

The multi-class EMSR levels of Eqs. (5.19)–(5.29) and the dynamic revision of Eqs. (5.31)–(5.32) are out of scope. Proofs need the discrete expectation identity E[min⁡(r,S)]−E[min⁡(r,S−1)]=P[r≥S]\mathbb E[\min(r,S)] - \mathbb E[\min(r,S-1)] = P[r \ge S]E[min(r,S)]−E[min(r,S−1)]=P[r≥S] and expectation of products of independent bounded functions, both in Mathlib's reach and reusable for other single-leg revenue models. Proofs of any milestone, and a proof of the goal from milestones 1, 2 and 4 plus the matching lower-half argument, are welcome.

Selected references

  • P. P. Belobaba, Air Travel Demand and Airline Seat Inventory Management, PhD thesis, MIT, Flight Transportation Laboratory Report R87-7, 1987 (no DOI).
  • K. Littlewood, Forecasting and control of passenger bookings, AGIFORS Symposium Proceedings 12, 1972; reprinted in Journal of Revenue and Pricing Management 4, 2005. https://doi.org/10.1057/palgrave.rpm.5170134
  • S. L. Brumelle and J. I. McGill, Airline seat allocation with multiple nested fare classes, Operations Research 41, 1993. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.41.1.127
  • R. E. Curry, Optimal airline seat allocation with fare classes nested by origins and destinations, Transportation Science 24, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1287/trsc.24.3.193
  • K. T. Talluri and G. J. van Ryzin, The Theory and Practice of Revenue Management, Springer, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1007/b139000
8 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear OptimizationOperations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Air Travel Demand and Airline Seat Inventory Management I: Marginal Seat Allocation Among Distinct Fare ClassesTextbook

Why airlines allocate seats by fare class

An airline sells the seats of one flight leg at several prices. Low fares fill seats that would otherwise fly empty; high fares are bought by passengers who book late and cannot be predicted exactly. Seat inventory control decides how many seats each fare class may sell. Peter Belobaba's 1987 MIT dissertation (MIT Flight Transportation Laboratory Report R87-7) gave the probabilistic treatment of this problem that became the expected marginal seat revenue (EMSR) method, which was in use across the airline industry for decades.

This mission formalizes the first, simplest model of the thesis: distinct (non-nested) fare-class inventories on a single leg, where a seat assigned to a class may be sold only in that class or not at all. The thesis surveys this model in Sect. 4.2 (pp. 84–94), where an integer-programming formulation from McDonnell-Douglas and its solution by ranking marginal values are described (p. 90), and develops it probabilistically in Sect. 5.1 (pp. 102–107).

Setting

A leg has capacity nnn seats (the thesis also writes CCC). There are finitely many fare classes iii. Class iii has an average fare fi≥0f_i \ge 0fi​≥0 and receives a random number of requests ri∈{0,1,2,… }r_i \in \{0,1,2,\dots\}ri​∈{0,1,2,…}, with law pip_ipi​. The seats are split into allocations Si∈NS_i \in \mathbb{N}Si​∈N, one per class.

With SSS seats, a class books requests until its seats run out, so its bookings and spill (refused requests) are

b=min⁡(r,S),l=(r−S)+(Eq. (5.3)).b = \min(r, S), \qquad l = (r - S)^+ \qquad \text{(Eq. (5.3))}.b=min(r,S),l=(r−S)+(Eq. (5.3)).

The expected revenue of class iii is Rˉi(Si)=fi⋅bˉi(Si)\bar R_i(S_i) = f_i \cdot \bar b_i(S_i)Rˉi​(Si​)=fi​⋅bˉi​(Si​) with bˉi(Si)=E[min⁡(ri,Si)]\bar b_i(S_i) = E[\min(r_i,S_i)]bˉi​(Si​)=E[min(ri​,Si​)], and the leg's expected revenue is Rˉ=∑iRˉi(Si)\bar R = \sum_i \bar R_i(S_i)Rˉ=∑i​Rˉi​(Si​) (Eq. (5.9)). Write

Pˉi(S)=P[ri≥S],EMSRi(S)=fi⋅Pˉi(S)(Eqs. (5.11), (6.1), (6.2)),\bar P_i(S) = P[r_i \ge S], \qquad \mathrm{EMSR}_i(S) = f_i \cdot \bar P_i(S) \qquad \text{(Eqs. (5.11), (6.1), (6.2))},Pˉi​(S)=P[ri​≥S],EMSRi​(S)=fi​⋅Pˉi​(S)(Eqs. (5.11), (6.1), (6.2)),

the expected marginal seat revenue of the SSS-th seat of class iii. The value of the kkk-th seat of class iii in the integer program of p. 90 is mi(k)=EMSRi(k)m_i(k) = \mathrm{EMSR}_i(k)mi​(k)=EMSRi​(k), k=1,…,nk = 1, \dots, nk=1,…,n.

Formalization targets

Goal: the nnn largest marginal values give the optimal booking limits (p. 90)

Let TTT be any set of nnn pairs (i,k)(i,k)(i,k), 1≤k≤n1 \le k \le n1≤k≤n, such that every mi(k)m_i(k)mi​(k) with (i,k)∈T(i,k) \in T(i,k)∈T is at least every mj(l)m_j(l)mj​(l) with (j,l)∉T(j,l) \notin T(j,l)∈/T, and let SiT=#{k:(i,k)∈T}S^T_i = \#\{k : (i,k) \in T\}SiT​=#{k:(i,k)∈T}. Then ∑iSiT=n\sum_i S^T_i = n∑i​SiT​=n and

∑ifi E[min⁡(ri,Si)]  ≤  ∑ifi E[min⁡(ri,SiT)]for every S with ∑iSi≤n.\sum_i f_i\, E[\min(r_i, S_i)] \;\le\; \sum_i f_i\, E[\min(r_i, S^T_i)] \qquad \text{for every } S \text{ with } \textstyle\sum_i S_i \le n .i∑​fi​E[min(ri​,Si​)]≤i∑​fi​E[min(ri​,SiT​)]for every S with ∑i​Si​≤n.

The goal fixes no distribution, number of classes or fare ordering, and it holds for every tie-breaking among equal marginal values.

Milestones

  1. Eq. (5.6): bˉi(S)+lˉi(S)=rˉi\bar b_i(S) + \bar l_i(S) = \bar r_ibˉi​(S)+lˉi​(S)=rˉi​ for requests of finite mean.
  2. Eq. (5.11): Rˉi(S)−Rˉi(S−1)=fi⋅P[ri≥S]\bar R_i(S) - \bar R_i(S-1) = f_i \cdot P[r_i \ge S]Rˉi​(S)−Rˉi​(S−1)=fi​⋅P[ri​≥S] for S≥1S \ge 1S≥1.
  3. Eqs. (6.1)–(6.2): Pˉi\bar P_iPˉi​ and EMSRi\mathrm{EMSR}_iEMSRi​ are non-increasing in SSS.
  4. Eq. (4.5): the 0–1 vector equal to 111 on a set of nnn largest mi(k)m_i(k)mi​(k) is an optimal solution of the linear program max⁡∑i,kXikmi(k)\max \sum_{i,k} X_{ik} m_i(k)max∑i,k​Xik​mi​(k) subject to ∑Xik≤n\sum X_{ik} \le n∑Xik​≤n, 0≤Xik≤10 \le X_{ik} \le 10≤Xik​≤1.
  5. Eq. (5.13), discrete form: an allocation of exactly CCC seats maximises Rˉ\bar RRˉ among such allocations if and only if some λ\lambdaλ satisfies EMSRi(Si)≥λ\mathrm{EMSR}_i(S_i) \ge \lambdaEMSRi​(Si​)≥λ whenever Si≥1S_i \ge 1Si​≥1 and EMSRi(Si+1)≤λ\mathrm{EMSR}_i(S_i + 1) \le \lambdaEMSRi​(Si​+1)≤λ, for all iii.

Significance

The goal is the reason distinct-inventory allocation is computationally easy: a revenue-maximising allocation is obtained by sorting n×(number of classes)n \times (\text{number of classes})n×(number of classes) numbers, with no search over allocations. The same marginal-value principle underlies the EMSR rules for nested classes in the rest of the thesis, and the identity (5.11) is the link between an expected-revenue function and its marginal seat values used throughout revenue management. Milestone 5 is the integer form of the Lagrangian condition of Eq. (5.13); the thesis states it only for a continuous relaxation, and its equality form is generally unattainable with integer seats.

These results are classical and their proofs are elementary; to our knowledge none of them has been machine-checked. The mission produces a reusable formal model of a single-leg, distinct-inventory allocation problem with integer demand (bookings, spill, revenue and marginal values of a PMF ℕ), and checked statements of the marginal-allocation principle for it.

Difficulty

The thesis argues with continuous densities and derivatives, setting ∂Rˉ/∂Si\partial \bar R / \partial S_i∂Rˉ/∂Si​ equal across classes. That argument does not transfer to integer seats: the derivative of a step-shaped expected-revenue function does not exist, equality of marginal values across classes generally fails at every integer allocation, and the tail probability must be P[r≥S]P[r \ge S]P[r≥S] rather than the P[r>S]P[r > S]P[r>S] of Eq. (5.2) for the marginal identity to hold. The integer statements need their own exchange argument. A second subtlety is ties: "the nnn largest values" is not unique, and the goal must hold for every admissible choice, including choices in which a class's selected seat numbers are not an initial segment {1,…,Si}\{1, \dots, S_i\}{1,…,Si​}.

Formalization scope

All declarations live in the namespace SeatInventory.Distinct. Conventions:

  • Integer demand. The law of class iii's requests is d i : PMF ℕ; expectations are series over N\mathbb{N}N. The thesis's continuous densities are replaced by this discrete model, which the thesis itself requires for seat allocations (p. 103).
  • Tail convention. Pˉ(S)=P[r≥S]\bar P(S) = P[r \ge S]Pˉ(S)=P[r≥S], as in Eq. (6.2) and the prose of Eq. (5.11) ("the probability of selling SiS_iSi​ or more seats"), not the P[r>S]P[r > S]P[r>S] of Eq. (5.2).
  • Seat numbers start at 1, and the pairs (i,k)(i,k)(i,k) range over k∈{1,…,n}k \in \{1, \dots, n\}k∈{1,…,n}, as the 600 variables of a 150-seat, four-class problem on p. 90 indicate.
  • Nonnegative fares fi≥0f_i \ge 0fi​≥0 are assumed in every statement that needs them; with a negative fare the capacity constraint ∑Si≤n\sum S_i \le n∑Si​≤n would not bind and the claims fail.
  • Finite mean of the requests is assumed explicitly for Eq. (5.6); the thesis assumes it silently. Expected bookings are bounded and need no assumption.
  • Capacity. The goal and the LP compare against allocations with ∑iSi≤n\sum_i S_i \le n∑i​Si​≤n (the LP's constraint); milestone 5 compares allocations of exactly CCC seats (Eq. (5.8)).
  • No independence assumption. Expected revenue of distinct inventories depends only on each class's marginal law, so the statements take one law per class.
  • "Decreasing" is non-increasing. The thesis's justification in Sect. 6.1.1 gives only monotonicity; strict decrease fails for bounded demand.
  • LP integrality. "The solution will be integer" is stated as: the indicator of every set of nnn largest values is optimal. With ties the LP also has fractional optima.

The expected revenue in the goal is computed from the booking rule min⁡(ri,Si)\min(r_i, S_i)min(ri​,Si​); it is not defined as a sum of marginal values, and the optimal allocation is not defined as an argmax of Rˉ\bar RRˉ. Either shortcut would make the goal a tautology and is ruled out.

Needed infrastructure: tail sums of a PMF ℕ, telescoping of E[min⁡(r,S)]E[\min(r, S)]E[min(r,S)], and a finite exchange argument for sums of the nnn largest values of a function on a finite set; the last two are reusable for any separable concave resource-allocation problem. Contributions of proofs of any milestone, and of a verified sorting routine that produces a set of nnn largest values, are welcome.

Selected references

  • P. P. Belobaba, Air Travel Demand and Airline Seat Inventory Management, PhD thesis, MIT Flight Transportation Laboratory Report R87-7, 1987 (no DOI).
  • P. P. Belobaba, Airline yield management: an overview of seat inventory control, Transportation Science 21(2), 63–73, 1987. https://doi.org/10.1287/trsc.21.2.63
  • P. P. Belobaba, Application of a probabilistic decision model to airline seat inventory control, Operations Research 37(2), 183–197, 1989. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.37.2.183
  • K. Littlewood, Forecasting and control of passenger bookings, AGIFORS Symposium Proceedings 12, 1972; reprinted in Journal of Revenue and Pricing Management 4(2), 111–123, 2005. https://doi.org/10.1057/palgrave.rpm.5170134
8 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Linear Programming: Foundations and Extensions I: Degeneracy and Termination of the Simplex Method under Bland's RuleTextbook

Motivation

The simplex method is the standard algorithm for linear programming, and its correctness rests on one question: does it stop? Each pivot of the method moves from one dictionary to another without decreasing the objective value, but a pivot can leave the objective unchanged. When that happens repeatedly, the method can return to a dictionary it has already visited and loop forever. This behaviour, cycling, is not hypothetical: Vanderbei's Chapter 3 exhibits a problem with four decision variables and three constraints on which the "largest coefficient" entering rule with a natural tie-breaking rule cycles through six dictionaries (Vanderbei 2014, pp. 26–27).

The chapter answers the question with two pivoting rules under which the simplex method provably terminates, and then draws the consequence that makes linear programming a finite theory: the fundamental theorem of linear programming. This mission formalizes the chapter's four numbered theorems in Vanderbei's own setting of standard-form problems with slack variables.

Timeline. Hoffman (1953) and Beale (1955) gave the first examples of cycling. The perturbation and lexicographic methods go back to Charnes (1952) and to Dantzig, Orden and Wolfe (1955). Bland (1977) introduced the smallest-index rule and proved that the simplex method terminates under it (Bland 1977).

Setting

A linear program in standard form has mmm constraints and nnn decision variables:

maximize ∑j=1ncjxjsubject to∑j=1naijxj≤bi (i=1,…,m),xj≥0 (j=1,…,n).\text{maximize } \sum_{j=1}^n c_j x_j \quad\text{subject to}\quad \sum_{j=1}^n a_{ij}x_j \le b_i\ (i=1,\dots,m),\qquad x_j \ge 0\ (j=1,\dots,n).maximize j=1∑n​cj​xj​subject toj=1∑n​aij​xj​≤bi​ (i=1,…,m),xj​≥0 (j=1,…,n).

A solution xxx is feasible if it satisfies every constraint, and optimal if in addition it maximizes the objective among feasible solutions. The problem is infeasible if no feasible solution exists, and unbounded if it has feasible solutions with arbitrarily large objective values.

The slack variables wi=bi−∑jaijxjw_i = b_i - \sum_j a_{ij}x_jwi​=bi​−∑j​aij​xj​ are appended to the list of variables as xn+i=wix_{n+i} = w_ixn+i​=wi​, so that the constraints become the linear system [A I] x=b[A\ I]\,x = b[A I]x=b with x≥0x \ge 0x≥0 in Rn+m\mathbb{R}^{n+m}Rn+m. A dictionary is given by a set B\mathcal BB of mmm basic indices whose columns of [A I][A\ I][A I] are linearly independent; the remaining indices N\mathcal NN are nonbasic. Solving for the basic variables gives

ζ=ζˉ+∑j∈Ncˉjxj,xi=bˉi−∑j∈Naˉijxj(i∈B).\zeta = \bar\zeta + \sum_{j\in\mathcal N}\bar c_j x_j,\qquad x_i = \bar b_i - \sum_{j\in\mathcal N}\bar a_{ij}x_j\quad (i\in\mathcal B).ζ=ζˉ​+j∈N∑​cˉj​xj​,xi​=bˉi​−j∈N∑​aˉij​xj​(i∈B).

The basic solution of the dictionary sets the nonbasic variables to zero. The dictionary is feasible if bˉi≥0\bar b_i \ge 0bˉi​≥0 for every i∈Bi\in\mathcal Bi∈B, and degenerate if bˉi=0\bar b_i = 0bˉi​=0 for some i∈Bi\in\mathcal Bi∈B.

The simplex method (Phase II) starts at a feasible dictionary and repeats a pivot: an entering variable xkx_kxk​ is chosen among the nonbasic variables with cˉk>0\bar c_k > 0cˉk​>0, and a leaving variable xlx_lxl​ among the basic variables with aˉlk>0\bar a_{lk} > 0aˉlk​>0 that minimize the ratio bˉl/aˉlk\bar b_l/\bar a_{lk}bˉl​/aˉlk​; then xkx_kxk​ becomes basic and xlx_lxl​ nonbasic. The method stops when no cˉj\bar c_jcˉj​ is positive (the dictionary is optimal) or when the entering column has no positive aˉik\bar a_{ik}aˉik​ (the problem is unbounded). A pivoting rule resolves the remaining choices. Bland's rule chooses both the entering and the leaving variable as the candidate with the smallest index. The lexicographic rule perturbs the right-hand sides by symbols 0<ϵm≪⋯≪ϵ1≪0<\epsilon_m\ll\dots\ll\epsilon_1\ll0<ϵm​≪⋯≪ϵ1​≪ all data and chooses the leaving variable by the perturbed ratio test.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.3 (termination under Bland's rule, p. 31)

From every feasible dictionary D0D_0D0​, there is no infinite sequence of pivots

D0→D1→D2→⋯D_0\to D_1\to D_2\to\cdotsD0​→D1​→D2​→⋯

in which both the entering and the leaving variable follow Bland's rule; and a finite sequence of such pivots reaches a dictionary DTD_TDT​ at which the method stops, optimal or exhibiting unboundedness.

Milestones

  • Theorem 3.1 (p. 27): if the simplex method fails to terminate, it must cycle, i.e. an infinite run visits some dictionary twice.
  • Theorem 3.2 (p. 30): the simplex method always terminates when the leaving variable is selected by the lexicographic rule.
  • Theorem 3.4 (p. 33), the fundamental theorem: (1) with no optimal solution the problem is infeasible or unbounded; (2) if a feasible solution exists, a basic feasible solution exists; (3) if an optimal solution exists, a basic optimal solution exists.

Significance

The result. Termination under Bland's rule is what turns the simplex method from a heuristic into an algorithm. Combined with Phase I, it yields the fundamental theorem of linear programming, which reduces the search for an optimum to finitely many basic solutions and underlies the duality theory of the following chapters. Bland's rule also needs no perturbation or extra bookkeeping, and it is the anticycling rule used in many correctness proofs of simplex-type and combinatorial pivoting algorithms, including oriented-matroid programming.

Formalizing it. All four theorems are classical and proved. The Prove2Me library has the lexicographic rule and a nondegenerate termination theorem in the tableau setting of Bertsimas and Tsitsiklis (equality form Ax=bAx=bAx=b, x≥0x\ge 0x≥0, full row rank), and the existence of basic feasible and optimal solutions in that form. It has no statement of Bland's theorem, and none of Vanderbei's dictionary formulation over [A I][A\ I][A I]. This mission produces a machine-checkable model of dictionaries and pivoting rules in that formulation, and targets Bland's theorem, whose proof is a genuine combinatorial argument rather than a monotonicity argument.

Difficulty

The natural argument for termination is monotonicity: each pivot increases the objective, so no dictionary repeats. It fails exactly at degenerate pivots, where the step length bˉl/aˉlk\bar b_l/\bar a_{lk}bˉl​/aˉlk​ is zero and the objective and the basic solution do not change. Bland's rule gives no potential function that strictly increases along degenerate pivots, so the proof has to reason about a hypothetical cycle as a whole: which variables enter and leave the basis within it, and how two dictionaries of the cycle, in which the same variable leaves and later enters, constrain each other's coefficients. Relating the coefficients of two different dictionaries of the same problem is the step that has no counterpart in the model's definitions and has to be developed.

For Theorem 3.2, the symbols ϵi\epsilon_iϵi​ cannot be replaced by a fixed small real number: the method treats them as formal quantities on separate scales, and the statement is about that symbolic rule.

Formalization scope

Vectors are Fin n → ℝ, Fin m → ℝ, and the constraint matrix is Matrix (Fin m) (Fin n) ℝ. The n+mn+mn+m variables are indexed by Fin (n + m) with the decision variables first and the slacks after them, which is the order x1,…,xn,xn+1=w1,…,xn+m=wmx_1,\dots,x_n,x_{n+1}=w_1,\dots,x_{n+m}=w_mx1​,…,xn​,xn+1​=w1​,…,xn+m​=wm​ that Bland's rule compares. A dictionary is a structure holding its basic set, a proof that it has mmm elements and a proof that its columns of [A I][A\ I][A I] are linearly independent; the coefficients bˉ,aˉ,cˉ,ζˉ\bar b,\bar a,\bar c,\bar\zetabˉ,aˉ,cˉ,ζˉ​ are computed as coordinates in the basis of basic columns. A dictionary is therefore determined by its basic set, as the proof of Theorem 3.1 uses. "Basic solution" is defined through such a dictionary, not as a support condition.

Termination is stated as the nonexistence of an infinite run from a feasible dictionary, for Theorems 3.2 and 3.3. The goal adds that a finite Bland run reaches a stopping dictionary, so that it cannot hold because pivots fail to exist. The lexicographic rule is encoded by lexicographic comparison of the coefficient vectors (bˉi,ri1,…,rim)/aˉik(\bar b_i, r_{i1},\dots,r_{im})/\bar a_{ik}(bˉi​,ri1​,…,rim​)/aˉik​ of the perturbed ratios; the symbol ϵp\epsilon_pϵp​ is attached in the starting dictionary to its ppp-th basic variable in increasing index order, which for the initial dictionary is the ppp-th constraint. Unboundedness in Theorem 3.4 is "for every MMM a feasible solution with objective >M>M>M", as defined on p. 7. The statements carry no explicit constants.

A formalization that stated Theorem 3.3 for arbitrary pivot sequences with pairwise distinct bases would be Theorem 3.1's counting argument, not Bland's theorem; the goal is stated for pivots that follow Bland's rule and only those.

A complete development needs: the pivot update of a dictionary and the invariance of the solution set under it, feasibility preservation by the ratio test, the relation between the objective rows of two dictionaries, and finiteness of the set of bases. These are reusable for any later formalization of simplex-type algorithms. Proofs of the milestones, alternative proofs of Theorem 3.3, and Phase I (to connect Theorem 3.4 with the algorithm) are welcome.

Selected references

  • R. J. Vanderbei, Linear Programming: Foundations and Extensions, 4th ed., International Series in Operations Research & Management Science 196, Springer, 2014, Chapter 3. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4614-7630-6
  • R. G. Bland, New finite pivoting rules for the simplex method, Mathematics of Operations Research 2(2):103–107, 1977. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.2.2.103
  • G. B. Dantzig, A. Orden, P. Wolfe, The generalized simplex method for minimizing a linear form under linear inequality restraints, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 5(2):183–195, 1955. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1955.5.183
  • E. M. L. Beale, Cycling in the dual simplex algorithm, Naval Research Logistics Quarterly 2(4):269–275, 1955. https://doi.org/10.1002/nav.3800020406
  • D. Bertsimas, J. N. Tsitsiklis, Introduction to Linear Optimization, Athena Scientific, 1997, §3.4 (lexicographic rule and Bland's rule in tableau form).
10 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationNumerical AnalysisOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Minimization Methods for Non-Differentiable Functions VII: Geometric Convergence of Subgradient Methods with Space Dilation along the GradientTextbook

Motivation

The subgradient method for a nonsmooth convex function converges, but slowly: when the level sets of the objective are elongated, the subgradient is nearly orthogonal to the direction towards the minimum, and the method zigzags. For smooth functions the remedy is a change of metric (Newton and quasi-Newton methods); for nonsmooth functions no Hessian exists to supply one. N. Z. Shor's answer was to learn a metric from the subgradients themselves: after each step, stretch the space along the latest (transformed) subgradient, so that components of future subgradients parallel to it are damped. These subgradient methods with space dilation along the gradient (SDG methods) are the ancestors of Shor's r-algorithm and of the ellipsoid method, which the book (p. 49) describes as a special case of the same family and which Khachiyan later used to show that linear programming is solvable in polynomial time.

Section 3.4 of Shor's monograph (Springer 1985, translated by K. C. Kiwiel and A. Ruszczyński, doi:10.1007/978-3-642-82118-9) proves that, under a two-sided condition on the objective, a suitable SDG method decreases function values at the speed of a geometric progression whose ratio is invariant under nonsingular linear changes of variables. This mission formalizes that chain of results.

Setting

Let EnE_nEn​ be the nnn-dimensional Euclidean space with inner product (x,y)(x,y)(x,y). For a unit vector ξ\xiξ and a coefficient α≥0\alpha \ge 0α≥0, the operator of space dilation along ξ\xiξ is

Rα(ξ) x=x+(α−1)(x,ξ) ξ,R_\alpha(\xi)\,x = x + (\alpha - 1)(x,\xi)\,\xi ,Rα​(ξ)x=x+(α−1)(x,ξ)ξ,

which multiplies the component of xxx along ξ\xiξ by α\alphaα and leaves the orthogonal complement fixed.

Let f:En→Rf : E_n \to \mathbb{R}f:En​→R and let g:En→Eng : E_n \to E_ng:En​→En​ be a generalized gradient: a subgradient of fff when fff is convex, an almost-gradient when fff is almost differentiable. The SDG method starts from x0x_0x0​ and a nonsingular operator B0=A0−1B_0 = A_0^{-1}B0​=A0−1​. At step k=0,1,…k = 0, 1, \dotsk=0,1,…: if g(xk)=0g(x_k) = 0g(xk​)=0 it stops; otherwise it forms the transformed gradient g~k=Bk∗g(xk)\tilde g_k = B_k^* g(x_k)g~​k​=Bk∗​g(xk​), the direction ξk+1=g~k/∥g~k∥\xi_{k+1} = \tilde g_k/\|\tilde g_k\|ξk+1​=g~​k​/∥g~​k​∥, and

xk+1=xk−hk+1Bkξk+1,Bk+1=BkR1/αk+1(ξk+1),Ak+1=Rαk+1(ξk+1)Ak,x_{k+1} = x_k - h_{k+1} B_k \xi_{k+1}, \qquad B_{k+1} = B_k R_{1/\alpha_{k+1}}(\xi_{k+1}), \qquad A_{k+1} = R_{\alpha_{k+1}}(\xi_{k+1}) A_k ,xk+1​=xk​−hk+1​Bk​ξk+1​,Bk+1​=Bk​R1/αk+1​​(ξk+1​),Ak+1​=Rαk+1​​(ξk+1​)Ak​,

with a stepsize hk+1h_{k+1}hk+1​ and a dilation coefficient αk+1\alpha_{k+1}αk+1​. So AkA_kAk​ is the accumulated space transformation, Bk=Ak−1B_k = A_k^{-1}Bk​=Ak−1​, and each step is a subgradient step for φk(y)=f(Bky)\varphi_k(y) = f(B_k y)φk​(y)=f(Bk​y) in the variables y=Akxy = A_k xy=Ak​x.

The quantitative results assume, for a point x∗x^*x∗ and the ball Sd={x:∥x−x∗∥≤d}S_d = \{x : \|x - x^*\| \le d\}Sd​={x:∥x−x∗∥≤d}, the two-sided condition

N [f(x)−f(x∗)]≤(g(x), x−x∗)≤M [f(x)−f(x∗)],x∈Sd,M>N>0.(3.18)N\,[f(x) - f(x^*)] \le (g(x),\, x - x^*) \le M\,[f(x) - f(x^*)], \qquad x \in S_d, \quad M > N > 0. \qquad (3.18)N[f(x)−f(x∗)]≤(g(x),x−x∗)≤M[f(x)−f(x∗)],x∈Sd​,M>N>0.(3.18)

For a convex function the lower inequality holds with N=1N = 1N=1; the upper one bounds how far fff is from a positively homogeneous function around x∗x^*x∗.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.4

Under (3.18), with B0=IB_0 = IB0​=I, x0∈Sdx_0 \in S_dx0​∈Sd​, stepsizes hk+1=2MNM+Nf(xk)−f(x∗)∥g~k∥h_{k+1} = \frac{2MN}{M+N}\frac{f(x_k)-f(x^*)}{\|\tilde g_k\|}hk+1​=M+N2MN​∥g~​k​∥f(xk​)−f(x∗)​, a constant coefficient 1<α≤M+NM−N1 < \alpha \le \frac{M+N}{M-N}1<α≤M−NM+N​, and GGG a bound for ∥g∥\|g\|∥g∥ on SdS_dSd​: there are c>0c > 0c>0 and indices k1<k2<⋯k_1 < k_2 < \cdotsk1​<k2​<⋯ with

f(xkp)−f(x∗)≤c α−kp/n,f(x_{k_p}) - f(x^*) \le c\,\alpha^{-k_p/n},f(xkp​​)−f(x∗)≤cα−kp​/n,

and for every k≥1k \ge 1k≥1

min⁡0≤i≤k−1 [f(xi)−f(x∗)]≤Gk(α2−1) dNα2k/n−1.\min_{0 \le i \le k-1}\,[f(x_i) - f(x^*)] \le \frac{G\sqrt{k(\alpha^2-1)}\,d}{N\sqrt{\alpha^{2k/n}-1}} .0≤i≤k−1min​[f(xi​)−f(x∗)]≤Nα2k/n−1​Gk(α2−1)​d​.

Milestones

  1. Eq. (3.4): ∥Rα(ξ)x∥=∥x∥2+(α2−1)(x,ξ)2\|R_\alpha(\xi)x\| = \sqrt{\|x\|^2 + (\alpha^2-1)(x,\xi)^2}∥Rα​(ξ)x∥=∥x∥2+(α2−1)(x,ξ)2​.
  2. Theorem 3.1: if ∥g(xk)∥≤d\|g(x_k)\| \le d∥g(xk​)∥≤d and 1+δ≤αk≤α∗1+\delta \le \alpha_k \le \alpha^*1+δ≤αk​≤α∗, then ∥g~kp∥<c (∏j≤kpαj)−1/n\|\tilde g_{k_p}\| < c\,(\prod_{j\le k_p}\alpha_j)^{-1/n}∥g~​kp​​∥<c(∏j≤kp​​αj​)−1/n along a subsequence.
  3. Theorem 3.2: for constant α>1\alpha > 1α>1 and B0=IB_0 = IB0​=I, min⁡0≤r≤k−1∥g~r∥≤dk(α2−1)/α2k/n−1\min_{0\le r\le k-1}\|\tilde g_r\| \le d\sqrt{k(\alpha^2-1)}/\sqrt{\alpha^{2k/n}-1}min0≤r≤k−1​∥g~​r​∥≤dk(α2−1)​/α2k/n−1​.
  4. Theorem 3.3: under (3.18) and the rules above, ∥Ak(xk−x∗)∥≤d\|A_k(x_k - x^*)\| \le d∥Ak​(xk​−x∗)∥≤d for all kkk.

Significance

The result shows that one fixed rule, depending only on MMM, NNN and nnn, yields linear convergence of function values for every objective satisfying (3.18), at a ratio α−1/n\alpha^{-1/n}α−1/n that does not deteriorate when the problem is badly scaled: the method, and hence its rate, is invariant under nonsingular linear changes of variables. This is the property the ellipsoid method inherits (Section 3.8 of the book), and the same space-dilation machinery drives the r-algorithm (Section 3.7), still used for large nonsmooth problems such as Lagrangian duals of integer programs.

The theorems are proved in the book; none of them, and no space-dilation method, has a machine-checked proof to our knowledge, and the platform has no statement about variable-metric subgradient methods. The mission provides a reusable formal model of the SDG iteration, the eigenvalue-growth arguments behind Theorems 3.1–3.2, and the one-step invariant of Theorem 3.3. The formalization also corrects two points of the printed text (see Formalization scope).

Difficulty

Theorem 3.3 is a one-step computation, but Theorems 3.1 and 3.2 are not: they relate the size of the transformed gradients to the growth of the singular values of AkA_kAk​, whose determinant is ∏jαj\prod_j \alpha_j∏j​αj​. A bound on ∥g~k∥\|\tilde g_k\|∥g~​k​∥ at a single step says nothing, since the dilations can concentrate in few directions; the argument has to control the largest singular value of AkA_kAk​ over many steps against the geometric-mean lower bound (det⁡Ak)1/n(\det A_k)^{1/n}(detAk​)1/n. The dimension nnn enters the rate exactly through this comparison. Theorem 3.4 then needs the invariant of Theorem 3.3 to keep every iterate inside SdS_dSd​, where (3.18) and the bound GGG are available.

Formalization scope

  • EnE_nEn​ is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) with n≥1n \ge 1n≥1 in the rate statements. Operators are continuous linear maps; B0B_0B0​ is a continuous linear equivalence and A0A_0A0​ its inverse. The state (xk,Bk,Ak)(x_k, B_k, A_k)(xk​,Bk​,Ak​) is produced by a defined recursion sdg, not assumed; g~k\tilde g_kg~​k​ is gTilde.
  • The stepsize rule receives the index, the current point and g~k\tilde g_kg~​k​; the dilation coefficient at step kkk is α (k+1). When g(xk)=0g(x_k) = 0g(xk​)=0 the state is repeated, which encodes the book's stop; no division by zero is used.
  • The book states Theorems 3.1–3.4 for almost differentiable fff with ggg an almost-gradient; the proofs use only the bounds on ∥g∥\|g\|∥g∥ and (3.18), so the Lean statements quantify over every map ggg with those properties. GGG is any bound for ∥g∥\|g\|∥g∥ on SdS_dSd​ in place of the maximum.
  • Theorems 3.2–3.4 take B0=IB_0 = IB0​=I, as their proofs do; Theorem 3.1 allows any nonsingular B0B_0B0​.
  • Two corrections to the printed statements, both following the proofs: Theorem 3.4's record bound carries the factor 1/N1/N1/N that the proof derives, and the record minima in Theorems 3.2 and 3.4 range over the indices 0,…,k−10, \dots, k-10,…,k−1 that the proof controls, rather than 1,…,k1, \dots, k1,…,k.
  • Constants ccc and subsequences are existential and chosen after the data of the run, before the index ppp. A statement placing ccc after ppp, or dropping (3.18) on SdS_dSd​, would be trivially true or false and is ruled out.

Useful infrastructure, reusable for the r-algorithm and ellipsoid chapters: identities for Rα(ξ)R_\alpha(\xi)Rα​(ξ), determinants and singular values of products of rank-one dilations, and the invariance of the SDG iteration under a linear change of variables. Proofs of any milestone, and alternative arguments for Theorem 3.1, are welcome.

Selected references

  • N. Z. Shor, Minimization Methods for Non-Differentiable Functions, Springer Series in Computational Mathematics 3, Springer, 1985, §§3.2–3.4, pp. 49–62 (translated by K. C. Kiwiel and A. Ruszczyński). https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-82118-9
17 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
AnalysisConvex Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Minimization Methods for Non-Differentiable Functions I: The Subdifferential of a Nonnegative Combination of Convex FunctionsTextbook

Motivation

Many optimization problems in operations research have objectives that are convex but not differentiable: the maximum of finitely many linear or smooth functions, the value function of a Lagrangian dual, the cost of a two-stage linear program as a function of the first-stage decision. Gradient methods do not apply to these directly. N. Z. Shor's Minimization Methods for Non-Differentiable Functions (Springer Series in Computational Mathematics 3, 1985; translated by K. C. Kiwiel and A. Ruszczyński from the 1979 Russian edition) develops the algorithms that replace the gradient by a subgradient, and its first chapter sets up the calculus of subgradients these algorithms rely on.

This mission is the first of a series formalizing the book. It covers §1.2 (convex functions and the concept of subgradient) and §1.3 (rules for computing subgradients), printed pages 7–16. Every later mission in the series (the subgradient method, space dilation, the ellipsoid method, decomposition) assumes that a subgradient of the objective can be computed, and §1.3 is where the book explains how: by combining subgradients of simpler pieces.

Setting

Write EnE_nEn​ for nnn-dimensional Euclidean space with inner product (x,y)(x, y)(x,y) and norm ∥x∥\|x\|∥x∥. A function fff with domain a convex set M⊆EnM \subseteq E_nM⊆En​ is convex if its epigraph {(u,x):u≥f(x), x∈M}\{(u, x) : u \ge f(x),\ x \in M\}{(u,x):u≥f(x), x∈M} is convex, equivalently (1−α)f(x1)+αf(x2)≥f((1−α)x1+αx2)(1-\alpha) f(x_1) + \alpha f(x_2) \ge f((1-\alpha)x_1 + \alpha x_2)(1−α)f(x1​)+αf(x2​)≥f((1−α)x1​+αx2​) for x1,x2∈Mx_1, x_2 \in Mx1​,x2​∈M and α∈[0,1]\alpha \in [0,1]α∈[0,1].

Let x0x_0x0​ be an interior point of MMM. A vector ggg is a subgradient (or generalized gradient) of fff at x0x_0x0​ if

f(x)−f(x0)≥(g,x−x0)for all x∈M.(1.3)f(x) - f(x_0) \ge (g, x - x_0) \qquad \text{for all } x \in M. \tag{1.3}f(x)−f(x0​)≥(g,x−x0​)for all x∈M.(1.3)

The set of all subgradients is the subdifferential, written G(x0)G(x_0)G(x0​) or Gf(x0)G_f(x_0)Gf​(x0​). For fff differentiable at x0x_0x0​ it is the single gradient; for f(x)=∣x∣f(x) = |x|f(x)=∣x∣ on E1E_1E1​ it is [−1,1][-1, 1][−1,1] at x0=0x_0 = 0x0​=0.

The one-sided directional derivative of fff at x0x_0x0​ in direction η\etaη is

fη′(x0)=lim⁡t→0+f(x0+tη)−f(x0)t.f'_\eta(x_0) = \lim_{t \to 0+} \frac{f(x_0 + t\eta) - f(x_0)}{t}.fη′​(x0​)=t→0+lim​tf(x0​+tη)−f(x0​)​.

A direction η≠0\eta \ne 0η=0 is a direction of steepest descent at x0x_0x0​ if min⁡∥ξ∥=1fξ′(x0)=fη′(x0)/∥η∥\min_{\|\xi\| = 1} f'_\xi(x_0) = f'_\eta(x_0)/\|\eta\|min∥ξ∥=1​fξ′​(x0​)=fη′​(x0​)/∥η∥.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1.12 (p. 13), the subdifferential of a nonnegative combination

For convex f1,…,fkf_1, \dots, f_kf1​,…,fk​ on EnE_nEn​ and a1,…,ak≥0a_1, \dots, a_k \ge 0a1​,…,ak​≥0, the function f=∑i=1kaifif = \sum_{i=1}^k a_i f_if=∑i=1k​ai​fi​ is convex and, at every x0x_0x0​,

Gf(x0)={∑i=1kaigi  :  gi∈Gfi(x0), i=1,…,k}.G_f(x_0) = \Big\{ \sum_{i=1}^k a_i g_i \;:\; g_i \in G_{f_i}(x_0),\ i = 1, \dots, k \Big\}.Gf​(x0​)={i=1∑k​ai​gi​:gi​∈Gfi​​(x0​), i=1,…,k}.

Both inclusions are part of the goal.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 1.7 (p. 9): at an interior point x0x_0x0​ of the domain, G(x0)G(x_0)G(x0​) is nonempty, bounded, convex and closed.
  2. Theorem 1.8 (p. 9): at an interior point, fη′(x0)f'_\eta(x_0)fη′​(x0​) exists for every η\etaη and fη′(x0)=max⁡g∈G(x0)(g,η)f'_\eta(x_0) = \max_{g \in G(x_0)} (g, \eta)fη′​(x0​)=maxg∈G(x0​)​(g,η), with the maximum attained.
  3. Corollary (p. 12): an interior point x0x_0x0​ minimizes fff on MMM if and only if 0∈G(x0)0 \in G(x_0)0∈G(x0​).
  4. Theorem 1.11 (p. 12): if 0∉G(x0)0 \notin G(x_0)0∈/G(x0​) and g0g_0g0​ is the element of G(x0)G(x_0)G(x0​) nearest the origin, then −g0-g_0−g0​ is a direction of steepest descent.
  5. Theorem 1.9 (p. 11): fff is convex on EnE_nEn​ if and only if fη′(x)f'_\eta(x)fη′​(x) exists everywhere and t↦fη′(x+tη)t \mapsto f'_\eta(x + t\eta)t↦fη′​(x+tη) is nondecreasing for all x,ηx, \etax,η.
  6. Theorem 1.10 (p. 11): a twice continuously differentiable fff is convex if and only if its Hessian is positive semidefinite everywhere.
  7. Theorem 1.13 (p. 14): for convex f1,…,fmf_1, \dots, f_mf1​,…,fm​, the function φ=max⁡ifi\varphi = \max_i f_iφ=maxi​fi​ is convex and Gfi(x0)⊆Gφ(x0)G_{f_i}(x_0) \subseteq G_\varphi(x_0)Gfi​​(x0​)⊆Gφ​(x0​) for every index iii active at x0x_0x0​.

Significance

The result. Theorem 1.12 is the finite-dimensional, finite-valued case of the Moreau–Rockafellar sum rule. With Theorem 1.13 it is the book's recipe for computing subgradients of functions assembled from simple pieces by nonnegative combinations and pointwise maxima, the two operations that produce most nonsmooth convex objectives in practice (Lagrangian duals, penalty functions, piecewise-linear costs). Theorem 1.8 identifies the directional derivative with the support function of the subdifferential; the Corollary and Theorem 1.11 give the optimality condition and the steepest-descent direction that every descent method for nonsmooth convex functions starts from.

Formalizing it. These results are classical and have been proved many times in textbooks (Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, 1970, §23). Mathlib at the pinned revision has convexity, separation theorems and Carathéodory's theorem, but no subdifferential of a convex function on EnE_nEn​ and no max formula. The mission builds that layer: a subdifferential with the book's inequality (1.3), a one-sided directional derivative defined as a right-hand limit, and the calculus rules above. The platform has a Clarke-gradient analogue of Theorem 1.8 for locally Lipschitz functions and a Banach-space sum rule for f+12∥⋅∥2f + \tfrac12\|\cdot\|^2f+21​∥⋅∥2; neither states the convex, finite-dimensional results here.

Difficulty

The inclusion "⊇\supseteq⊇" in Theorem 1.12 is immediate from (1.3). The inclusion "⊆\subseteq⊆" is the content: a subgradient of the sum is a global object, and nothing in (1.3) splits it into subgradients of the pieces. Adding the inequalities of the pieces only produces vectors of the right form; it does not show every subgradient of fff arises this way. Any argument has to use the finite dimension and the interior-point setting, which is where Theorems 1.7 and 1.8 (existence of subgradients, compactness of G(x0)G(x_0)G(x0​), existence of one-sided derivatives) come in.

Theorem 1.8 in turn needs the existence of a finite right-hand limit of the difference quotient, which requires both monotonicity of the quotient and a lower bound, and the existence of a subgradient attaining the maximum, which is a separation statement. Theorem 1.9's "if" direction must rebuild convexity from one-sided derivative information alone, with no differentiability assumption.

Formalization scope

  • EnE_nEn​ is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) and (x,y)(x, y)(x,y) is inner ℝ x y. A function is f : EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) → ℝ; the domain MMM is a set, convexity on it is ConvexOn ℝ M f (which includes convexity of MMM), and interior points are x₀ ∈ interior M. Theorems 1.9, 1.10, 1.12 and 1.13 are stated on all of EnE_nEn​ (Set.univ), as the book proves them.
  • The subdifferential subdifferential M f x₀ is the set of ggg with f(x)−f(x0)≥(g,x−x0)f(x) - f(x_0) \ge (g, x - x_0)f(x)−f(x0​)≥(g,x−x0​) for all x∈Mx \in Mx∈M. It is defined for any x0x_0x0​; the interior-point assumption is a hypothesis of each theorem that needs it.
  • HasOneSidedDirDeriv f x₀ η d is the right-hand limit Tendsto … (𝓝[>] 0) (𝓝 d), not Mathlib's two-sided lineDeriv. Maxima and minima are stated with IsGreatest/IsLeast (attained), never with sSup/sInf.
  • Theorem 1.12 is an equality of sets over indices Fin k; k=0k = 0k=0 and zero coefficients are allowed, as in the book. Theorem 1.13's maximum is Finset.sup' over Fin m with m≥1m \ge 1m≥1, and it asserts only the inclusion the book states.
  • Theorem 1.11 is stated as the book's proof establishes it: the steepest-descent direction is minus the minimal-norm subgradient. The printed statement names the minimal-norm subgradient itself, along which the directional derivative is positive.
  • A formalization that states only "⊇\supseteq⊇" in Theorem 1.12, or only that each ∑aigi\sum a_i g_i∑ai​gi​ is a subgradient, is the easy half and does not count as the goal.
  • Theorems 1.1–1.6 (supporting hyperplane, separation, representation by extremal points, the convexity inequality, continuity on the interior) are Mathlib-level (geometric_hahn_banach_*, Carathéodory and Krein–Milman, ConvexOn.continuousOn_interior) and are not restated.

Contributions welcome: proofs of any milestone, a reusable lemma that the difference quotient of a convex function is monotone in ttt, and a general max formula; these are reusable in the later missions of the series, which define subgradients the same way.

Selected references

  • N. Z. Shor, Minimization Methods for Non-Differentiable Functions, Springer Series in Computational Mathematics 3, Springer, 1985, §§1.2–1.3, pp. 7–16. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-82118-9
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970, §23 (subgradients) and Theorem 23.8 (sum rule). https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
  • J.-J. Moreau, "Fonctionnelles sous-différentiables", Comptes Rendus de l'Académie des Sciences 257 (1963), 4117–4119.
10 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOperations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Numerical Techniques for Stochastic Optimization II: Logarithmic Concavity of Probabilistic ConstraintsTextbook

Motivation

Many engineering and economic planning problems must meet random requirements with a prescribed reliability: a reservoir must satisfy demand with probability at least 0.950.950.95, a power system must cover load except on rare days, an inventory must avoid shortage with high probability. Probabilistic constrained programming (also called chance-constrained programming) models this by requiring that a system of random inequalities hold jointly with probability at least ppp.

The first obstacle to solving such problems is structural. The probability that random constraints are satisfied is, in general, neither concave nor convex in the decision, so the feasible set need not be convex and local search can stall. Prékopa's theory of logarithmically concave measures (1971–1973) removed that obstacle for a large class of distributions, and it is the basis of the numerical methods of Chapter 5 of Ermoliev and Wets, Numerical Techniques for Stochastic Optimization (Springer 1988). This mission formalizes the structural theorems of that chapter.

Timeline:

  • 1959: Charnes and Cooper, individual chance constraints.
  • 1971: Prékopa, logarithmic concave measures with application to stochastic programming (Acta Sci. Math. Szeged 32).
  • 1973: Prékopa, logarithmic concave measures and functions (Acta Sci. Math. Szeged 34), containing the marginal theorem: marginals of log-concave functions are log-concave.
  • 1970s–1980s: nonlinear programming methods for (5.1) (SUMT with logarithmic penalty, supporting hyperplanes, reduced gradients) combined with Monte Carlo evaluation of h0h_0h0​; the chapter surveys them.

Setting

Let ξ\xiξ be a random vector in Rq\mathbb R^qRq on a probability space (Ω,F,P)(\Omega, \mathcal F, P)(Ω,F,P) and let g1,…,gr:Rn×Rq→Rg_1, \dots, g_r : \mathbb R^n \times \mathbb R^q \to \mathbb Rg1​,…,gr​:Rn×Rq→R. The chapter studies problem (5.1):

min⁡h(x)s.t.h0(x)=P(g1(x,ξ)≥0,…,gr(x,ξ)≥0)≥p,h1(x)≥p1,…,hm(x)≥pm.\min h(x) \quad \text{s.t.} \quad h_0(x) = P\bigl(g_1(x,\xi) \ge 0, \dots, g_r(x,\xi) \ge 0\bigr) \ge p, \quad h_1(x) \ge p_1, \dots, h_m(x) \ge p_m .minh(x)s.t.h0​(x)=P(g1​(x,ξ)≥0,…,gr​(x,ξ)≥0)≥p,h1​(x)≥p1​,…,hm​(x)≥pm​.

The function h0h_0h0​ is the probability function (chanceProb in Lean). In the special case gi(x,y)=Tix−yig_i(x,y) = T_i x - y_igi​(x,y)=Ti​x−yi​ it equals F(Tx)F(Tx)F(Tx), where FFF is the joint distribution function of ξ\xiξ.

A function f≥0f \ge 0f≥0 is logarithmically concave on a convex set SSS if

f(λu+(1−λ)v)≥f(u)λf(v)1−λ,u,v∈S, 0<λ<1.f(\lambda u + (1-\lambda) v) \ge f(u)^{\lambda} f(v)^{1-\lambda}, \qquad u, v \in S,\ 0 < \lambda < 1 .f(λu+(1−λ)v)≥f(u)λf(v)1−λ,u,v∈S, 0<λ<1.

Where f>0f > 0f>0 this is concavity of log⁡f\log flogf; the power form also makes sense where f=0f = 0f=0. Nondegenerate normal densities, uniform densities on convex bodies and exponential densities are log-concave.

Section 5.7 introduces the polynomial distribution (5.19) on the cube 0<zj≤10 < z_j \le 10<zj​≤1:

F(z1,…,zn)=1∑i=1Nciz1αi1⋯znαin,ci>0, αij≤0, ∑jαij<0F(z_1, \dots, z_n) = \frac{1}{\sum_{i=1}^{N} c_i z_1^{\alpha_{i1}} \cdots z_n^{\alpha_{in}}}, \qquad c_i > 0,\ \alpha_{ij} \le 0,\ \textstyle\sum_j \alpha_{ij} < 0F(z1​,…,zn​)=∑i=1N​ci​z1αi1​​⋯znαin​​1​,ci​>0, αij​≤0, ∑j​αij​<0

(polyDistF in Lean).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.1

If g1,…,grg_1, \dots, g_rg1​,…,gr​ are jointly concave on Rn+q\mathbb R^{n+q}Rn+q and ξ\xiξ has a log-concave density fff on Rq\mathbb R^qRq, then

h0 is logarithmically concave on Rn.h_0 \text{ is logarithmically concave on } \mathbb R^n .h0​ is logarithmically concave on Rn.

Its immediate consequence is that the feasible set {x:h0(x)≥p}\{x : h_0(x) \ge p\}{x:h0​(x)≥p} is convex for every ppp.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 5.2.1: if hhh is log-concave on the convex set H={h≥p}H = \{h \ge p\}H={h≥p}, 0<p<10 < p < 10<p<1, then h−ph - ph−p is log-concave on HHH. This makes the logarithmic penalty function (5.5) of the SUMT method convex.
  2. Theorem 5.2.2: under the standing assumptions of §5.2, every interior point zzz of the feasible set of (5.1) satisfies hi(z)>pih_i(z) > p_ihi​(z)>pi​, i=0,…,mi = 0, \dots, mi=0,…,m.
  3. Theorem 5.7.1 (proved content, (5.21)): for n=2n = 2n=2 and oppositely ordered exponents, ∂2F/∂z1∂z2≥0\partial^2 F / \partial z_1 \partial z_2 \ge 0∂2F/∂z1​∂z2​≥0 on (0,1)2(0,1)^2(0,1)2.
  4. Theorem 5.7.2: the polynomial distribution function is log-concave on (0,1]n(0,1]^n(0,1]n.

The platform theorem ConvexOptimization.prekopa_marginal_log_concave (Prékopa's marginal theorem, proved) is included as a reference item.

Significance

Theorem 5.1 turns a probabilistic constraint into a convex constraint after taking logarithms. This is what makes convergence proofs for nonlinear programming methods (SUMT with logarithmic penalty, supporting hyperplanes, reduced gradients) applicable to (5.1) and to the reliability maximization problem (5.4); without it, those methods have no guarantee of finding a global optimum. Theorems 5.2.1 and 5.2.2 are the two facts that make the SUMT method of §5.2 well defined and convex on the interior of the feasible set. Theorem 5.7.2 shows that probabilistic constraints under the polynomial distribution define convex sets, so they can be added to geometric programmes.

On status: Theorem 5.1 is a classical result, proved in Prékopa's papers (the chapter itself refers to Prékopa's survey for the proof). Prékopa's marginal theorem and the Prékopa–Leindler inequality are already machine-checked on this platform; Theorem 5.1 and the §5.2 and §5.7 theorems are, as far as a search of the platform shows, not formalized. The work is formalizing known proofs, in the log-concavity predicate the platform already uses.

Difficulty

The obvious argument for Theorem 5.1, "the constraint set is convex and the density is log-concave, so the probability is log-concave", hides the real content: log-concavity of a probability as a function of a parameter is a statement about integrals, and it does not follow from pointwise properties of the integrand without a Prékopa–Leindler-type inequality. Concavity of each gig_igi​ separately in xxx and in yyy is not enough; joint concavity in (x,y)(x, y)(x,y) is used essentially. The probability function vanishes on large regions in typical examples, so any argument that takes logarithms pointwise fails at the boundary of its support.

For Theorem 5.2.2 the naive argument fails at the index i=0i = 0i=0: nothing about h0h_0h0​ is assumed directly, and log-concavity of h0h_0h0​ is exactly Theorem 5.1. For Theorem 5.7.1 the difficulty is a sign condition on a covariance; without the ordering hypothesis the mixed derivative can be negative.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb R^nRn and Rq\mathbb R^qRq are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) and EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin q); the constraint functions take pairs (x,y)(x, y)(x,y) in the product, and concavity is ConcaveOn ℝ Set.univ on that product (joint concavity). A "continuous probability distribution with density fff" is stated as P.map ξ = volume.withDensity (ENNReal.ofReal ∘ f) with ξ\xiξ and fff measurable and PPP a probability measure. Log-concavity is the platform definition ConvexOptimization.LogConcaveOn (nonnegativity plus the power inequality), imported as a reference item; concavity of Real.log ∘ h₀ would be a different, wrong property because Lean's Real.log 0 = 0. Indices are 0-based (Fin r, Fin m, Fin N, Fin n); the probabilistic constraint i=0i = 0i=0 of Theorem 5.2.2 is stated separately from h1,…,hmh_1, \dots, h_mh1​,…,hm​. The polynomial distribution is a formula on Fin n → ℝ with real powers, used only on the cube.

No constant of the book is replaced by an explicit value: every result of this chapter is qualitative.

Corrections of the printed text, recorded in each item's Formalization Note:

  • Theorem 5.1 states the density condition "for every x1,x2∈Rnx_1, x_2 \in \mathbb R^nx1​,x2​∈Rn"; the density lives on Rq\mathbb R^qRq and the condition is imposed there.
  • (5.19) prints the first factor as ziαi1z_i^{\alpha_{i1}}ziαi1​​ and the domain index as i=1,…,Ni = 1, \dots, Ni=1,…,N; they are read as z1αi1z_1^{\alpha_{i1}}z1αi1​​ and j=1,…,nj = 1, \dots, nj=1,…,n.
  • Theorem 5.7.1 prints its ordering hypothesis with transposed indices (α11≤α12≤⋯≤α1n\alpha_{11} \le \alpha_{12} \le \dots \le \alpha_{1n}α11​≤α12​≤⋯≤α1n​); following the proof, it is read as: across the NNN terms the z1z_1z1​-exponents increase and the z2z_2z2​-exponents decrease.
  • Theorem 5.7.1 claims "is a probability distribution function"; the book proves only (5.21), and normalization would need ∑ici=1\sum_i c_i = 1∑i​ci​=1, which is not assumed. The formal statement is (5.21), the mixed derivative as an iterated deriv.

Theorem 5.2.2 carries all six assumptions of §5.2, including compactness of the feasible set and the Slater point; it does not assume log-concavity of h0h_0h0​, which must be derived from the density and concavity hypotheses. A trivializing formalization, such as one with a density hypothesis that no probability law satisfies or a log-concavity predicate that holds for every function vanishing somewhere, is ruled out: the density hypotheses are satisfiable (checked locally) and LogConcaveOn is the multiplicative inequality at every pair of points.

Needed infrastructure: Prékopa's marginal theorem (available), log-concavity of indicators of convex sets and of products, measurability of the constraint set, and Artin's theorem that a sum of log-convex functions is log-convex (for Theorem 5.7.2). Artin's theorem and closure properties of LogConcaveOn are reusable beyond this mission, and contributions of them are welcome.

Selected references

  • A. Prékopa, "Numerical Solution of Probabilistic Constrained Programming Problems", in Yu. Ermoliev and R. J-B Wets (eds.), Numerical Techniques for Stochastic Optimization, Springer Series in Computational Mathematics 10, Springer 1988, Ch. 5, pp. 123–139. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-61370-8
  • A. Prékopa, "Logarithmic concave measures with application to stochastic programming", Acta Sci. Math. (Szeged) 32 (1971), 301–316.
  • A. Prékopa, "On logarithmic concave measures and functions", Acta Sci. Math. (Szeged) 34 (1973), 335–343.
  • A. Charnes and W. W. Cooper, "Chance-constrained programming", Management Science 6 (1959), 73–79. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.6.1.73
  • B. L. Miller and H. M. Wagner, "Chance constrained programming with joint constraints", Operations Research 13 (1965), 930–945. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.13.6.930
  • A. Prékopa, Stochastic Programming, Kluwer 1995. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-94-017-3087-7
9 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationLinear OptimizationOperations Research+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Numerical Techniques for Stochastic Optimization I: Edmundson–Madansky Bounds for Independent Random Data and Simple RecourseTextbook

Motivation

In a two-stage stochastic linear program a decision xxx is taken before random data ξ\xiξ are observed, and a corrective recourse decision yyy is taken afterwards at a cost. The objective contains the expectation of an optimal value of a linear program, ∫Q(x,ξ(ω)) P(dω)\int Q(x,\xi(\omega))\,P(d\omega)∫Q(x,ξ(ω))P(dω), and for continuous or high-dimensional ξ\xiξ that integral cannot be evaluated exactly. Practical methods therefore replace ξ\xiξ by a discrete random vector and control the error by computable lower and upper bounds on the expected recourse cost. Chapter 2 of Ermoliev and Wets (eds.), Numerical Techniques for Stochastic Optimization (Springer 1988), by P. Kall, A. Ruszczyński and K. Frauendorfer, surveys these bounds as they were used in the codes of the time: Jensen's inequality from below, the Edmundson–Madansky inequality from above, and the special structure of simple recourse, where the expected cost is available in closed form.

Timeline. Jensen's inequality (1906) gives the lower bound for a convex integrand. A. Madansky, "Bounds on the expectation of a convex function of a multivariate random variable", Ann. Math. Statist. 30 (1959), and H. P. Edmundson (RAND report, 1956) gave the upper bound by the two-point law on the endpoints of an interval, and its product version for independent components. Kall and Stoyan (1982), Huang, Ziemba and Ben-Tal (1977), Frauendorfer and Kall (1988) developed partition refinement of both bounds, the scheme this chapter describes; Frauendorfer (1988) extended the upper bound to dependent data on boxes.

Setting

The two-stage problem (2.11) is: minimize ψ(x)=cTx+∫ΩQ(x,ξ(ω)) P(dω)\psi(x)=c^Tx+\int_\Omega Q(x,\xi(\omega))\,P(d\omega)ψ(x)=cTx+∫Ω​Q(x,ξ(ω))P(dω) subject to Ax=bAx=bAx=b, x≥0x\ge 0x≥0. The recourse cost Q(x,ξ)Q(x,\xi)Q(x,ξ) is the optimal value of the second-stage problem (2.12),

Q(x,ξ)=min⁡{qTy:Wy=h−Tx, y≥0},ξ=(q,h,T),Q(x,\xi)=\min\{q^Ty : Wy=h-Tx,\ y\ge 0\},\qquad \xi=(q,h,T),Q(x,ξ)=min{qTy:Wy=h−Tx, y≥0},ξ=(q,h,T),

with a deterministic m2×n2m_2\times n_2m2​×n2​ matrix WWW (fixed recourse), and Q=+∞Q=+\inftyQ=+∞ when (2.12) is infeasible. Throughout the chapter the book assumes complete recourse, {Wy:y≥0}=Rm2\{Wy:y\ge0\}=\mathbb R^{m_2}{Wy:y≥0}=Rm2​, and dual feasibility: for every realization of qqq some uuu satisfies WTu≤qW^Tu\le qWTu≤q. Under these assumptions QQQ is finite. The expected recourse function is Q(x)=∫Q(x,ξ(ω)) P(dω)\mathcal Q(x)=\int Q(x,\xi(\omega))\,P(d\omega)Q(x)=∫Q(x,ξ(ω))P(dω).

The Edmundson–Madansky law of an interval [a,b][a,b][a,b], a<ba<ba<b, with mean ξ0\xi^0ξ0 puts mass p1=(b−ξ0)/(b−a)p_1=(b-\xi^0)/(b-a)p1​=(b−ξ0)/(b−a) at aaa and p2=(ξ0−a)/(b−a)p_2=(\xi^0-a)/(b-a)p2​=(ξ0−a)/(b−a) at bbb (2.32). For a box Ξ=×j=1m[aj,bj]\Xi=\times_{j=1}^m[a_j,b_j]Ξ=×j=1m​[aj​,bj​] and means ξj0\xi^0_jξj0​, the vector ξ^\hat\xiξ^​ with independent components of these two-point laws sits at the vertex vvv with probability ∏jpj(vj)\prod_j p_j(v_j)∏j​pj​(vj​).

Simple recourse is the case W=[I,−I]W=[I,-I]W=[I,−I], q=[q+,q−]q=[q^+,q^-]q=[q+,q−] with qj++qj−≥0q^+_j+q^-_j\ge0qj+​+qj−​≥0, deterministic TTT and random hhh only. With χ=Tx\chi=Txχ=Tx the recourse cost splits into one-row costs Qj(χj,hj)=qj+(hj−χj)Q_j(\chi_j,h_j)=q^+_j(h_j-\chi_j)Qj​(χj​,hj​)=qj+​(hj​−χj​) if hj≥χjh_j\ge\chi_jhj​≥χj​, and qj−(χj−hj)q^-_j(\chi_j-h_j)qj−​(χj​−hj​) otherwise.

Formalization targets

Goal: the Edmundson–Madansky bound for independent components (p. 46)

If ξ\xiξ has independent components ξj∈[aj,bj]\xi_j\in[a_j,b_j]ξj​∈[aj​,bj​] with means ξj0\xi^0_jξj0​, and φ\varphiφ is convex on Ξ=×j[aj,bj]\Xi=\times_j[a_j,b_j]Ξ=×j​[aj​,bj​], then

Eφ(ξ)≤∑v∈vert Ξ(∏j=1mpj(vj))φ(v).E\varphi(\xi)\le\sum_{v\in\mathrm{vert}\,\Xi}\Big(\prod_{j=1}^m p_j(v_j)\Big)\varphi(v).Eφ(ξ)≤v∈vertΞ∑​(j=1∏m​pj​(vj​))φ(v).

The book applies it to φ=Q(x,⋅)\varphi=Q(x,\cdot)φ=Q(x,⋅); the goal is stated for every convex φ\varphiφ, with the explicit weights of (2.32).

Milestones

  1. Properties (b), (d), (e) of p. 40: Q(x,⋅)Q(x,\cdot)Q(x,⋅) is piecewise linear and convex in (h,T)(h,T)(h,T); Q(⋅,ξ)Q(\cdot,\xi)Q(⋅,ξ) is convex piecewise linear in xxx; the expected recourse function is finite and convex under finite second moments.
  2. The Jensen lower bound (2.26)–(2.27) on a partition (a published, proved theorem, reused).
  3. The dual-multiplier lower bound (2.30)–(2.31).
  4. The one-dimensional Edmundson–Madansky inequality (2.32)–(2.34).
  5. For simple recourse: separability (2.46)–(2.49), the closed form (2.51) of EQjEQ_jEQj​, and the bounds (2.55)–(2.56) from the one-block problem.

Significance

The upper bound is the half of the bounding scheme that is not automatic. Jensen's inequality needs only a mean; an upper bound on the expectation of a convex function needs a bounded support and, in the product form, independence. Together they give a certified interval for the optimal value of a two-stage problem, and repeated partitioning of the support shrinks that interval; this is the basis of the sequential approximation methods of §2.2.4 and of later codes. The dual-multiplier bound and the simple-recourse formulas are the pieces that make those intervals cheap to compute.

The results are classical and proved in the literature cited on the page. The one-dimensional Edmundson–Madansky inequality and the general extreme-point form of the upper bound (a measure on the extreme points reproducing the barycentre) are already formalized on Prove2Me in the Introduction to Stochastic Programming series, as is the partition Jensen bound. The product form for independent components is not: deriving it from the extreme-point form requires constructing the product kernel, which is the content of this mission. The recourse properties (b), (d), (e) for a general distribution with finite second moments, the dual-multiplier bound and the simple-recourse formulas are not formalized anywhere known to this mission.

Difficulty

The obvious argument inducts on the dimension, applying the one-dimensional inequality in one coordinate while the others are held fixed. That step needs the conditional law of the remaining coordinates given the first to be their unconditional law, i.e. independence expressed as a product decomposition of the joint law, and it needs φ\varphiφ with one coordinate replaced by an endpoint to remain convex on the lower-dimensional box and integrable. For dependent components the inequality is false with these weights: on [0,1]2[0,1]^2[0,1]2 with means (12,12)(\tfrac12,\tfrac12)(21​,21​) and φ(x,y)=(x−y)2\varphi(x,y)=(x-y)^2φ(x,y)=(x−y)2, the product law gives 12\tfrac1221​ while mass 12\tfrac1221​ at (1,0)(1,0)(1,0) and at (0,1)(0,1)(0,1) gives 111. The book's remark that the product law is extremal among all laws on Ξ\XiΞ with the given mean fails for this reason when m≥2m\ge2m≥2, and is not part of this mission.

For the recourse properties the difficulty is bookkeeping: QQQ is an extended-real optimal value, and finiteness, measurability in ω\omegaω and integrability must be derived from complete recourse, dual feasibility and the moment hypothesis rather than assumed.

Formalization scope

Vectors are functions from finite index types to R\mathbb RR (ι → ℝ), matrices are Mathlib Matrix, and random data live on a probability space (Ω, P). The recourse cost is an EReal infimum over the feasible set, so infeasibility gives +∞+\infty+∞ and unboundedness −∞-\infty−∞ exactly as on p. 39; theorems that integrate it carry complete recourse and dual feasibility, which make it finite. The expected recourse function integrates the real part of the recourse cost. Independence of the components is ProbabilityTheory.iIndepFun; the box is Set.pi univ (fun j => Icc (a j) (b j)), with aj<bja_j<b_jaj​<bj​, and values in the box are required almost surely. The upper bound is the explicit sum over Boolean vertex labels of products of the weights (2.32); no abstract extremal measure is used.

Conventions fixed where the page is silent or ambiguous:

  • Properties (b), (d), (e) are stated on all of Rn1\mathbb R^{n_1}Rn1​: under the standing complete-recourse assumption K2=Rn1K_2=\mathbb R^{n_1}K2​=Rn1​. "Convex piecewise linear" is rendered as a maximum of finitely many affine functions.
  • The book's hypothesis of finite second moments in (e) is kept as stated, componentwise.
  • The book writes QQQ for both Q(x,ξ)Q(x,\xi)Q(x,ξ) and Q(x)\mathcal Q(x)Q(x), and reuses Q~\tilde QQ~​, ψ~\tilde\psiψ~​ for different functions in (2.27) and (2.30)–(2.31); the Lean names are recourseCost, expectedRecourse and dualLowerBound.
  • In (2.51) a conditional mean on a null event is 000 in Lean; it always appears multiplied by that event's probability, so the formula is unchanged.
  • In (2.56) the minimum is a real infimum over the nonempty first-stage feasible set; attainment is not claimed.
  • No constant of the chapter is hidden behind O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅); all bounds are explicit.

A goal stated for affine φ\varphiφ (where it is an equality), or with ξ^\hat\xiξ^​ allowed to be any discrete law with the right mean, would be trivial or a different theorem; the weights are the products of (2.32), and independence of the components is a hypothesis.

A complete development needs: finite-dimensional LP duality with extended-real values (reusable across all recourse missions), measurability and integrability of optimal-value functions, the conditional-independence step for product measures, and the one-dimensional chord inequality. The partitioned upper bound (2.37) and the discrete reformulation (2.21), (2.28) are natural follow-up statements on the same definitions.

Selected references

  • P. Kall, A. Ruszczyński, K. Frauendorfer, "Approximation Techniques in Stochastic Programming", in Yu. Ermoliev and R. J-B Wets (eds.), Numerical Techniques for Stochastic Optimization, Springer Series in Computational Mathematics 10, Springer 1988, Ch. 2, pp. 33–64. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-61370-8
  • A. Madansky, "Bounds on the expectation of a convex function of a multivariate random variable", Annals of Mathematical Statistics 30 (1959), 743–746. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoms/1177706203
  • P. Kall, Stochastic Linear Programming, Springer 1976. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-66252-2
  • R. J-B Wets, "Stochastic programs with fixed recourse: the equivalent deterministic program", SIAM Review 16 (1974), 309–339. https://doi.org/10.1137/1016053
  • K. Frauendorfer, "Solving SLP recourse problems with arbitrary multivariate distributions — the dependent case", Mathematics of Operations Research 13 (1988), 377–394. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.13.3.377
  • J. R. Birge, F. Louveaux, Introduction to Stochastic Programming, Springer 1997, Ch. 8. https://doi.org/10.1007/b97617
13 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsLinear OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

An Efficient Approximation Scheme for the One-Dimensional Bin-Packing Problem II: Geometric Grouping with Residual LP RoundingResearch Paper

Motivation

One-dimensional bin packing asks for the fewest unit-capacity bins that hold a given list of items with sizes in (0,1)(0,1)(0,1). Deciding whether two bins suffice is NP-hard (it contains the partition problem), so no polynomial-time algorithm guarantees a ratio below 3/23/23/2 unless P = NP. The natural question is therefore asymptotic: how small can the additive error A(I)−OPT(I)A(I) - OPT(I)A(I)−OPT(I) be made, as a function of the optimum OPT(I)OPT(I)OPT(I)?

  • 1974: D. S. Johnson, A. Demers, J. D. Ullman, M. R. Garey and R. L. Graham analysed First Fit and First Fit Decreasing, with asymptotic ratios 17/1017/1017/10 and 11/911/911/9 (SIAM J. Comput. 3(4)).
  • 1981: W. Fernandez de la Vega and G. S. Lueker gave an asymptotic approximation scheme: for every ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0, (1+ε) OPT(I)+1(1+\varepsilon)\,OPT(I) + 1(1+ε)OPT(I)+1 bins in linear time (Combinatorica 1).
  • 1982: N. Karmarkar and R. M. Karp replaced the multiplicative error by an additive one: OPT(I)+O(log⁡2OPT(I))OPT(I) + O(\log^2 OPT(I))OPT(I)+O(log2OPT(I)) bins in polynomial time (Proc. 23rd FOCS). This mission formalizes that bound.
  • 2017: R. Hoberg and T. Rothvoss improved the additive error to O(log⁡OPT)O(\log OPT)O(logOPT) (SODA 2017). Whether OPT(I)+O(1)OPT(I) + O(1)OPT(I)+O(1) is achievable remains open.

Its main device, geometric grouping followed by rounding a linear program over bin configurations, recurs in later additive results and in cutting-stock problems.

Setting

An instance III is a finite multiset of piece sizes in the open interval (0,1)(0,1)(0,1). Write n(I)n(I)n(I) for the number of pieces, m(I)m(I)m(I) for the number of distinct sizes, SIZE(I)SIZE(I)SIZE(I) for the total size and a(I)a(I)a(I) for the smallest size. A packing is a multiset of bins whose union is III and in each of which the sizes sum to at most 111; its cost is the number of bins, and OPT(I)OPT(I)OPT(I) is the least cost.

A configuration is a nonempty multiset of sizes occurring in III that fits in one bin. The fractional bin-packing problem is the linear program

(I)min⁡ 1⋅xs.t.x≥0,Ax≥b,(I)\qquad \min\ \mathbf 1\cdot x\quad\text{s.t.}\quad x \ge 0,\quad Ax \ge b,(I)min 1⋅xs.t.x≥0,Ax≥b,

with one variable xjx_jxj​ per configuration, where AtjA_{tj}Atj​ counts the pieces of size ttt in configuration jjj and btb_tbt​ the pieces of size ttt in III. Its value is LIN(I)LIN(I)LIN(I). A basic feasible solution is an extreme point of the feasible region.

Geometric grouping with parameter kkk sorts the pieces in non-increasing order and cuts them into consecutive groups G1,G2,…,GqG_1, G_2, \dots, G_qG1​,G2​,…,Gq​, each the shortest run of pieces of total size at least kkk. Within each group GiG_iGi​ (i≥2i \ge 2i≥2) only as many of the largest pieces as Gi−1G_{i-1}Gi−1​ has are kept; they are rounded up to the largest size in GiG_iGi​, giving Gi′G_i'Gi′​. The rounded pieces form JJJ, and G1G_1G1​ together with the unrounded leftovers ΔGi\Delta G_iΔGi​ form J′J'J′.

ALGORITHM 2 with a positive integer kkk and a positive real ggg:

  1. Eliminate all pieces of size ≤g\le g≤g.
  2. While SIZE>1+11−1/kln⁡1gSIZE > 1 + \frac{1}{1-1/k}\ln\frac1gSIZE>1+1−1/k1​lng1​: group the current instance into J,J′J, J'J,J′; pack J′J'J′ in at most 2k[2+ln⁡1g]2k[2 + \ln\frac1g]2k[2+lng1​] bins; obtain a basic feasible solution xxx of the LP of JJJ with cost at most LIN(J)+1LIN(J)+1LIN(J)+1; open ⌊xj⌋\lfloor x_j\rfloor⌊xj​⌋ bins of each configuration jjj, fill them with pieces, and delete the pieces so packed.
  3. Pack the remaining pieces in at most 2+21−1/kln⁡1g2 + \frac{2}{1-1/k}\ln\frac1g2+1−1/k2​lng1​ bins.
  4. Reinsert the eliminated pieces, using a new bin only when necessary.

Its cost on III is written A(I)A(I)A(I).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4 with explicit constants

For every instance III with SIZE(I)≥2SIZE(I) \ge 2SIZE(I)≥2, every packing that ALGORITHM 2 with k=2k=2k=2 and g=1/SIZE(I)g = 1/SIZE(I)g=1/SIZE(I) can output is a packing of III with

A(I)≤OPT(I)+(1+log⁡2OPT(I))(9+4ln⁡OPT(I))+2+4ln⁡OPT(I).A(I) \le OPT(I) + \bigl(1 + \log_2 OPT(I)\bigr)\bigl(9 + 4\ln OPT(I)\bigr) + 2 + 4\ln OPT(I).A(I)≤OPT(I)+(1+log2​OPT(I))(9+4lnOPT(I))+2+4lnOPT(I).

This is the paper's A(I)≤OPT(I)+O(log⁡2OPT(I))A(I) \le OPT(I) + O(\log^2 OPT(I))A(I)≤OPT(I)+O(log2OPT(I)), with the constants that its proof yields.

The general bound for ALGORITHM 2

For integers k≥2k \ge 2k≥2, 0<g≤120 < g \le \tfrac120<g≤21​ and SIZE(I)≥1SIZE(I) \ge 1SIZE(I)≥1:

A(I)≤max⁡{(1+2g) OPT(I)+1, OPT(I)+[1+ln⁡SIZE(I)ln⁡k][1+4k+2kln⁡1g]+2+21−1kln⁡1g}.A(I) \le \max\Bigl\{(1+2g)\,OPT(I) + 1,\ OPT(I) + \Bigl[1 + \frac{\ln SIZE(I)}{\ln k}\Bigr]\Bigl[1 + 4k + 2k\ln\frac1g\Bigr] + 2 + \frac{2}{1-\frac1k}\ln\frac1g\Bigr\}.A(I)≤max{(1+2g)OPT(I)+1, OPT(I)+[1+lnklnSIZE(I)​][1+4k+2klng1​]+2+1−k1​2​lng1​}.

Milestones

In attack order: Lemmas 1–3; Theorem 2 (items 1–3, the bound on J′J'J′, item 4 corrected); the per-iteration shrinking of SIZESIZESIZE; the bound on the number ttt of iterations; the telescoping of LINLINLIN; the bin count after Step 3; the general bound.

Significance

The bound gives a polynomial-time algorithm whose additive error is polylogarithmic in the optimum, hence a fully polynomial asymptotic approximation scheme (O(log⁡2OPT)=o(OPT)O(\log^2 OPT) = o(OPT)O(log2OPT)=o(OPT)). Varying kkk and ggg trades running time for error, as the paper notes after Theorem 4. The scheme of solving the rounded LP, keeping its integer part and re-grouping the residual is reused by later additive results, including the O(log⁡OPT)O(\log OPT)O(logOPT) bound of Hoberg and Rothvoss.

The result has been proved since 1982. No machine-checked proof of it, or of any bin-packing approximation guarantee of this kind, is known to exist in Lean or Mathlib. The mission produces a formal version whose hypotheses and constants are explicit. It also corrects two printed statements whose published forms are false: Theorem 2, item 4, and the chain of inequalities in the analysis that relies on it. The corrections are disclosed in the statements.

Difficulty

Rounding a single LP solution does not suffice. A basic solution of the configuration LP has at most mmm fractional variables, and after rounding down, the leftover pieces form an instance of size at most m(J)m(J)m(J). With linear grouping that leftover is of order 1/ε21/\varepsilon^21/ε2 and costs a constant factor. The difficulty is making the residual shrink geometrically. Geometric grouping must produce an instance JJJ with m(J)≤SIZE/k+O(ln⁡(1/g))m(J) \le SIZE/k + O(\ln(1/g))m(J)≤SIZE/k+O(ln(1/g)) distinct sizes while discarding only O(kln⁡(1/g))O(k\ln(1/g))O(kln(1/g)) in J′J'J′. The residual must then be re-grouped and re-solved. Each step must be accounted for simultaneously in SIZESIZESIZE, LINLINLIN and OPTOPTOPT, with an additive loss per iteration; the harmonic-sum estimate behind SIZE(J′)SIZE(J')SIZE(J′) and the telescoping of LINLINLIN across iterations carry most of the weight.

Formalization scope

  • Model. An instance is a Multiset ℝ with sizes in the open interval (0,1)(0,1)(0,1); real sizes generalize the paper's rationals, and the interval is open because a group of size at least kkk must contain more than kkk pieces. Packings are Multiset (Multiset ℝ). OPTOPTOPT and LINLINLIN are infima over nonempty sets. LP solutions are finitely supported functions on configurations; "basic" means extreme point.
  • Subroutine contract. The Fractional Bin-Packing procedure is modelled only by its stated output: any basic feasible solution of cost at most LIN(J)+1LIN(J)+1LIN(J)+1. The ellipsoid method of §6 is not modelled.
  • Runs. ALGORITHM 2 is a relation Alg2Run k g I P, witnessed by a trace. Every bound holds for every run: every admissible subroutine output, every packing at Steps 2 and 3 within the prescribed counts, every choice of pieces for the principal bins (which must fill every available slot), and every order of the Step 4 insertion. A separate well-definedness item states that a run exists, so the bounds are not vacuous.
  • Explicit constants. O(log⁡2OPT(I))O(\log^2 OPT(I))O(log2OPT(I)) in Theorem 4 is replaced by (1+log⁡2OPT)(9+4ln⁡OPT)+2+4ln⁡OPT(1+\log_2 OPT)(9 + 4\ln OPT) + 2 + 4\ln OPT(1+log2​OPT)(9+4lnOPT)+2+4lnOPT. The asymptotic threshold is made explicit as SIZE(I)≥2SIZE(I) \ge 2SIZE(I)≥2. ln⁡\lnln is Real.log and log⁡2\log_2log2​ is Real.logb 2.
  • Corrected statements. The last group of geometric grouping may fall short of kkk, which the paper ignores. For it, ΔGq\Delta G_qΔGq​ consists of the max⁡(0,lq−lq−1)\max(0, l_q - l_{q-1})max(0,lq​−lq−1​) smallest pieces. Theorem 2, item 4 is stated as m(J)≤SIZE(J)/k+ln⁡(1/a(I))+1m(J) \le SIZE(J)/k + \ln(1/a(I)) + 1m(J)≤SIZE(J)/k+ln(1/a(I))+1; the printed version without +1+1+1 fails for I={0.95,0.95,0.95,0.9}I = \{0.95, 0.95, 0.95, 0.9\}I={0.95,0.95,0.95,0.9}, k=2k = 2k=2. Theorem 2 is stated for integers k≥2k \ge 2k≥2, which its proof needs. The iteration bound is stated for t≥1t \ge 1t≥1 and for the instance after Step 1.
  • Out of scope. Running times, polynomiality, the function T(m,n)T(m,n)T(m,n), the number of subroutine calls, §6, ALGORITHM 3 and Theorem 5.
  • Ruling out trivial versions. "There exists a packing with at most OPT(I)+…OPT(I) + \dotsOPT(I)+… bins" is trivially true and is not the goal. The goal bounds every output of the algorithm, and the existence item shows that outputs exist.

Contributions welcome: milestone proofs; a harmonic-sum bound ∑j=ab1/j≤ln⁡ba−1\sum_{j=a}^{b} 1/j \le \ln\frac{b}{a-1}∑j=ab​1/j≤lna−1b​; extreme-point facts for {x≥0:Ax≥b}\{x \ge 0 : Ax \ge b\}{x≥0:Ax≥b} (at most as many nonzero coordinates as rows; an optimal extreme point exists), reusable beyond bin packing; monotonicity of LINLINLIN and OPTOPTOPT under the piecewise order.

Selected references

  • N. Karmarkar, R. M. Karp, An Efficient Approximation Scheme for the One-Dimensional Bin-Packing Problem, Proc. 23rd Annual Symposium on Foundations of Computer Science (SFCS 1982), IEEE, pp. 312–320, 1982. https://doi.org/10.1109/SFCS.1982.61
  • W. Fernandez de la Vega, G. S. Lueker, Bin packing can be solved within 1 + ε in linear time, Combinatorica 1(4), 349–355, 1981. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02579456
  • D. S. Johnson, A. Demers, J. D. Ullman, M. R. Garey, R. L. Graham, Worst-case performance bounds for simple one-dimensional packing algorithms, SIAM J. Comput. 3(4), 299–325, 1974. https://doi.org/10.1137/0203025
  • R. Hoberg, T. Rothvoss, A Logarithmic Additive Integrality Gap for Bin Packing, Proc. 28th ACM-SIAM SODA, 2616–2625, 2017. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611974782.172
21 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Algorithmic Game TheoryMechanism DesignOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Algorithmic Mechanism Design I: MinWork Is a Strongly Truthful n-Approximation Mechanism for Task Scheduling on Unrelated MachinesResearch Paper

Motivation

Algorithmic mechanism design asks for algorithms whose inputs are held by self-interested parties. Each party reports its private data, the algorithm computes an outcome, and payments are arranged so that no party gains by misreporting. Nisan and Ronen introduced the field in Algorithmic Mechanism Design (Games Econ. Behav. 35, 2001). Their running example is task scheduling on unrelated machines: kkk tasks are distributed among nnn machines owned by different agents, each agent knows only its own processing times, and the designer wants to minimize the make-span.

Without incentives the problem is classical: minimizing make-span on unrelated machines is NP-hard and admits a polynomial 2-approximation (Lenstra, Shmoys, Tardos, 1990). With selfish agents the question changes: which approximation ratios can a truthful mechanism guarantee? This mission formalizes the paper's upper bound, the MinWork mechanism, which is the benchmark every later lower bound for truthful scheduling is compared with.

Timeline.

  • 1961: Vickrey introduces the second-price auction (J. Finance 16).
  • 1971–1973: Clarke and Groves generalize it to the VCG family of truthful mechanisms for utilitarian objectives (Groves, Econometrica 41, 1973).
  • 1999/2001: Nisan and Ronen show MinWork is a strongly truthful nnn-approximation, and that no truthful mechanism beats ratio 2.
  • 2007: Christodoulou, Koutsoupias and Vidali raise the deterministic lower bound to 1+21+\sqrt21+2​ for n≥3n \ge 3n≥3; Koutsoupias and Vidali later raise it to 1+φ≈2.6181+\varphi \approx 2.6181+φ≈2.618.
  • 2023: Christodoulou, Koutsoupias and Kovács prove the Nisan–Ronen conjecture: no deterministic truthful mechanism achieves a ratio below nnn (STOC 2023, arXiv:2301.11905), so MinWork is optimal among deterministic truthful mechanisms.

Setting

There are nnn agents and kkk tasks. Agent iii's type is the vector ti=(t1i,…,tki)t^i = (t^i_1,\dots,t^i_k)ti=(t1i​,…,tki​) of positive times, tji>0t^i_j > 0tji​>0 being the time agent iii needs to perform task jjj. A type vector is t=(t1,…,tn)t = (t^1,\dots,t^n)t=(t1,…,tn). An allocation xxx sends each task jjj to one agent; xix^ixi is the set of tasks agent iii receives. The make-span of xxx is

g(x,t)=max⁡i∑j∈xitji,g(x,t) = \max_{i} \sum_{j \in x^i} t^i_j ,g(x,t)=imax​j∈xi∑​tji​,

and agent iii's valuation is vi(x,ti)=−∑j∈xitjiv^i(x,t^i) = -\sum_{j \in x^i} t^i_jvi(x,ti)=−∑j∈xi​tji​.

A direct mechanism asks every agent to declare a type, computes an allocation x(d)x(d)x(d) from the declared vector ddd, and hands agent iii a payment pi(d)p^i(d)pi(d). Agent iii's utility is pi(d)+vi(x(d),ti)p^i(d) + v^i(x(d), t^i)pi(d)+vi(x(d),ti), with tit^iti its true type. The mechanism is truthful if declaring tit^iti maximizes agent iii's utility for every declaration of the others, and strongly truthful if truth-telling is the only such dominant strategy. An allocation rule is a ccc-approximation if g(x(t),t)≤c⋅g(y,t)g(x(t),t) \le c \cdot g(y,t)g(x(t),t)≤c⋅g(y,t) for every type vector ttt and every allocation yyy.

The MinWork mechanism allocates each task to an agent with minimal declared time for it, breaking ties arbitrarily. For each task it wins, an agent receives the second-best declared time min⁡i′≠idji′\min_{i' \ne i} d^{i'}_jmini′=i​dji′​:

pi(d)=∑j∈xi(d)min⁡i′≠idji′.p^i(d) = \sum_{j \in x^i(d)} \min_{i' \neq i} d^{i'}_j .pi(d)=j∈xi(d)∑​i′=imin​dji′​.

The Lean development uses the same names: load, makespan, IsTruthful, IsStronglyTruthful, IsApprox, IsMinWorkAlloc, secondBest, minTime, minWorkPay.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.1

For n≥2n \ge 2n≥2 and every MinWork allocation rule xxx with payments ppp as above,

(x,p) is strongly truthfulandg(x(t),t)≤n⋅g(y,t)  for all positive t and all allocations y.(x,p)\ \text{is strongly truthful} \quad\text{and}\quad g(x(t),t) \le n \cdot g(y,t)\ \ \text{for all positive } t \text{ and all allocations } y .(x,p) is strongly truthfulandg(x(t),t)≤n⋅g(y,t)  for all positive t and all allocations y.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 3.1 (Groves): a VGC mechanism is truthful. This is an existing platform theorem, used as a reference.
  2. MinWork belongs to the VGC family. Its allocation maximizes ∑ivi(ti,x)\sum_i v^i(t^i,x)∑i​vi(ti,x), and its payment is ∑i′≠ivi′(ti′,x(t))+h−i\sum_{i'\ne i} v^{i'}(t^{i'},x(t)) + h^{-i}∑i′=i​vi′(ti′,x(t))+h−i with h−i=∑jmin⁡i′≠itji′h^{-i} = \sum_j \min_{i'\ne i} t^{i'}_jh−i=∑j​mini′=i​tji′​.
  3. Claim 4.2: MinWork is strongly truthful.
  4. g(x(t),t)≤∑jmin⁡itjig(x(t),t) \le \sum_{j} \min_i t^i_jg(x(t),t)≤∑j​mini​tji​.
  5. g(y,t)≥1n∑jmin⁡itjig(y,t) \ge \frac1n \sum_j \min_i t^i_jg(y,t)≥n1​∑j​mini​tji​ for every allocation yyy.
  6. Claim 4.3: MinWork is an nnn-approximation.

Significance

The theorem gives the first positive result for truthful scheduling: a mechanism that is truthful in the strongest sense and is within a factor nnn of optimal, whatever the tie-breaking rule. Every lower bound in the paper (Theorems 4.6, 4.10 and 4.12) and in the later literature measures itself against this ratio. Since the 2023 resolution of the Nisan–Ronen conjecture, the ratio nnn is known to be tight for deterministic truthful mechanisms.

The result is proved in the paper; it is not known to be formalized in any proof assistant. The platform already has Groves' theorem in an abstract form (AGT.vcg_incentive_compatible). This mission connects that abstract statement to a concrete combinatorial mechanism, and it adds the strict part of strong truthfulness for any number of tasks and agents, which the paper proves only for one task and two agents. The vocabulary (make-span over unrelated machines, direct scheduling mechanisms, strong truthfulness) is shared with the seven later missions of this series.

Difficulty

Truthfulness follows from Groves' theorem once MinWork is identified as a VGC mechanism. The identification requires the payment identity at every declared vector and under every tie-breaking rule, including ties at the winning time. The main difficulty is the strict part of strong truthfulness. A misreport that differs from the truth only on one task must still be shown to lose strictly for some declarations of the others. Those declarations must stay positive, and on every other task they must leave the outcome unchanged. The paper's proof covers only one task and two agents and leaves the general case as "similar". Its printed inequality also has the two utilities in the wrong order (see below), so it cannot be transcribed directly.

Formalization scope

  • Agents are Fin n and tasks are Fin k. An allocation is a function Fin k → Fin n, and an agent may receive no task. Types are positive reals, and every truthfulness and approximation quantifier ranges over positive true types, positive misreports and positive declarations of the others.
  • Payments are handed to the agent, so utility is the payment minus the true time spent. Payments are computed from the declared vector, never from true types.
  • The allocation rule is a parameter satisfying the MinWork specification (IsMinWorkAlloc). Every result holds for every tie-breaking rule, including rules that depend on the whole declared vector. No particular argmin is fixed.
  • n≥2n \ge 2n≥2 is a hypothesis of the goal and of the truthfulness items: with a single agent the paper's second-best minimum is undefined. The approximation items need only n≥1n \ge 1n≥1. There is no hypothesis on kkk.
  • The make-span and both minima are Finset.sup' / Finset.inf' over nonempty finite sets, so they are true maxima and minima with no default values.
  • Strong truthfulness is formalized as truthfulness plus: every misreport di≠tid^i \ne t^idi=ti is strictly worse than the truth for some positive declarations of the others. Given truthfulness this is equivalent to Definition 5. A formalization that states only that truth-telling is dominant, or proves strictness only for single-task instances, does not meet the goal. Neither does an existential ratio in place of nnn.
  • Printed slip: in the proof of Claim 4.2 (p. 177) the case di>tid^i > t^idi>ti reads "the utility for agent iii is ti−di<0t^i - d^i < 0ti−di<0, instead of 0 in the case of truth-telling". With the Definition 11 payments the misreporting agent loses the task (utility 0), and the truthful agent wins it with utility d3−i−ti>0d^{3-i} - t^i > 0d3−i−ti>0. The milestone text keeps the paper's words; the Lean statements assert what the argument establishes.
  • Out of scope: running time ("polynomial time"), and the paper's general revelation-principle framework (Proposition 2.1).
  • Welcome contributions: proofs of the milestones, and a reusable lemma connecting the local VGC milestone to AGT.vcg_incentive_compatible.

Selected references

  • N. Nisan, A. Ronen, Algorithmic Mechanism Design, Games and Economic Behavior 35 (2001) 166–196. https://doi.org/10.1006/game.1999.0790
  • T. Groves, Incentives in Teams, Econometrica 41 (1973) 617–631. https://doi.org/10.2307/1914085
  • W. Vickrey, Counterspeculation, Auctions, and Competitive Sealed Tenders, Journal of Finance 16 (1961) 8–37. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1540-6261.1961.tb02789.x
  • J. K. Lenstra, D. B. Shmoys, É. Tardos, Approximation algorithms for scheduling unrelated parallel machines, Mathematical Programming 46 (1990) 259–271. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01585745
  • G. Christodoulou, E. Koutsoupias, A. Kovács, A Proof of the Nisan-Ronen Conjecture, STOC 2023. https://arxiv.org/abs/2301.11905
9 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Linear OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Selected Topics in Column Generation III: Ryan–Foster Branching — a Fractional Basic Set-Partitioning Solution Covers Some Row Pair FractionallyResearch Paper

Motivation

Column generation solves linear programs with far too many variables to list: one works with a small subset J′⊆JJ' \subseteq JJ′⊆J of the columns, the restricted master problem (RMP), and adds columns of negative reduced cost as a pricing problem finds them (Lübbecke and Desrosiers 2005, §2.1). Many integer programs from vehicle routing, crew scheduling and crew pairing are reformulated so that the master problem is a set-partitioning problem: every row (a customer, a flight leg, a task) must be covered by exactly one selected column (a route, a pairing, a schedule). The linear relaxation of such a master is solved by column generation, and an integer solution is then sought by branch-and-price, branch-and-bound with column generation at every node.

Branching in branch-and-price is not free. Fixing a master variable λj\lambda_jλj​ to 000 does not stop the pricing problem from regenerating the same column, and handling that complicates the pricing problem. The rule that avoids this for set partitioning goes back to Ryan and Foster (1981): branch on a pair of rows, requiring them to be covered either by the same column or by two different columns. Both requirements are constraints the pricing problem can respect directly. Lübbecke and Desrosiers call it "the most common scheme in conjunction with column generation" (§7.3, p. 1020) and state the proposition that makes it well defined as their Proposition 3.

Timeline:

  • 1981: Ryan and Foster introduce the pair-of-rows branching rule for set partitioning in crew scheduling.
  • 1998: the branch-and-price survey of Barnhart et al. (1998) presents the rule as the branching scheme for set-partitioning masters.
  • 2005: Lübbecke and Desrosiers state it as Proposition 3 of their survey, attributing it to Ryan and Foster without proof.

Setting

Rows are indexed by {1,…,m}\{1, \dots, m\}{1,…,m} and columns by a finite set J′J'J′. A matrix A=(arj)∈{0,1}m×∣J′∣A = (a_{rj}) \in \{0,1\}^{m \times |J'|}A=(arj​)∈{0,1}m×∣J′∣ has every entry equal to 000 or 111; column jjj covers row rrr when arj=1a_{rj} = 1arj​=1. The set-partitioning system of the RMP's linear relaxation is

Aλ=1,λ≥0,λ∈RJ′.A\lambda = \mathbf 1, \qquad \lambda \ge \mathbf 0, \qquad \lambda \in \mathbb R^{J'} .Aλ=1,λ≥0,λ∈RJ′.

A vector λ\lambdaλ is a basic feasible solution of this system when it satisfies all its constraints and, among the constraints active at λ\lambdaλ (the mmm equality rows, and the constraints λj≥0\lambda_j \ge 0λj​≥0 with λj=0\lambda_j = 0λj​=0), there are ∣J′∣|J'|∣J′∣ linearly independent ones. Equivalently, λ\lambdaλ is feasible and the columns of AAA in the support of λ\lambdaλ are linearly independent. A solution is fractional when it is not a 0/10/10/1 vector, λ∉{0,1}∣J′∣\lambda \notin \{0,1\}^{|J'|}λ∈/{0,1}∣J′∣.

For two rows r,sr, sr,s the Ryan–Foster quantity is ∑j∈J′arjasjλj\sum_{j \in J'} a_{rj} a_{sj} \lambda_j∑j∈J′​arj​asj​λj​, written pairCover A lam r s in Lean: the total weight on the columns that cover both rows. For r=sr = sr=s it is the row sum, equal to 111 on every feasible λ\lambdaλ.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 3 (p. 1020)

For every 0/10/10/1 matrix AAA and every fractional basic feasible solution λ\lambdaλ of Aλ=1A\lambda = \mathbf 1Aλ=1, λ≥0\lambda \ge \mathbf 0λ≥0,

∃ r,s∈{1,…,m}:0<∑j∈J′arj asj λj<1.\exists\, r, s \in \{1, \dots, m\}: \qquad 0 < \sum_{j \in J'} a_{rj}\, a_{sj}\, \lambda_j < 1 .∃r,s∈{1,…,m}:0<j∈J′∑​arj​asj​λj​<1.

The two rows are automatically distinct. The statement concerns every fractional basic solution, not only an optimal one, and no cost vector enters it.

Milestone: the branches keep every integer solution (§7.3, p. 1020)

For every 0/10/10/1 solution λ∈{0,1}∣J′∣\lambda \in \{0,1\}^{|J'|}λ∈{0,1}∣J′∣ of Aλ=1A\lambda = \mathbf 1Aλ=1 and every pair of rows r,sr, sr,s,

∑j∈J′arj asj λj∈{0,1}.\sum_{j \in J'} a_{rj}\, a_{sj}\, \lambda_j \in \{0, 1\} .j∈J′∑​arj​asj​λj​∈{0,1}.

This is the paper's requirement that "integer solutions remain intact" (p. 1019), specialised to the two branches "=1= 1=1" and "=0= 0=0" of the paragraph after Proposition 3.

Significance

Proposition 3 is what makes Ryan–Foster branching a valid branching scheme in the sense of §7.3: the current fractional solution violates both branches for the chosen pair, so it is excluded from both children, while by the milestone every integer solution survives in one of them. The same pair-of-rows idea underlies branching in bin packing, graph colouring, vehicle routing and crew scheduling codes, where it is used because both branches translate into constraints on the pricing problem rather than on individual master variables.

The paper states the result and refers its proof to Ryan and Foster (1981); no machine-checked version of the proposition is known. This mission produces a formal statement tied to a standard, representation-aware definition of basic solutions (Bertsimas–Tsitsiklis Definition 2.9, already on the platform) and, once proved, a verified lemma that any formal development of branch-and-price for set partitioning can cite.

Difficulty

An argument that uses only feasibility and a fractional coordinate cannot work. Without basicness the claim is false: with one row and two identical columns, A=[1 1]A = [1\ 1]A=[1 1], the vector λ=(12,12)\lambda = (\tfrac12, \tfrac12)λ=(21​,21​) is feasible and fractional, yet the only pair of rows is r=sr = sr=s, whose quantity is 111. The difficulty is to turn basicness, a linear-algebra condition, into a combinatorial statement about which rows the fractional columns cover. A set-partitioning matrix need not have full row rank, so the familiar description of basic solutions through an invertible basis matrix is not available in general.

Formalization scope

  • Rows are Fin m and columns Fin n, so J′J'J′ is identified with {0,…,n−1}\{0, \dots, n-1\}{0,…,n−1}. AAA is a real matrix Matrix (Fin m) (Fin n) ℝ with the hypothesis IsZeroOneMatrix A (every entry 000 or 111); λ\lambdaλ is lam : Fin n → ℝ, since λ is a Lean keyword. Columns are 0/10/10/1 vectors; the equivalent reading as subsets of the rows is only prose.
  • "Basic solution" is not defined in the paper. It is read as Bertsimas–Tsitsiklis Definition 2.9 for the standard-form constraint family: LinearOptimization.IsBasicFeasibleSolution (LinearOptimization.stdFormSystem A (fun _ => 1)) lam, from the platform definitions BasicSolution and ActiveConstraints. This definition needs no full-row-rank assumption, which a set-partitioning matrix need not satisfy, and it is not replaced by an ad hoc support condition.
  • Typo correction. The paper writes "i.e., λ∉{0,1}m\lambda \notin \{0,1\}^mλ∈/{0,1}m". Since λ\lambdaλ has one coordinate per column, the statement reads it as λ∉{0,1}∣J′∣\lambda \notin \{0,1\}^{|J'|}λ∈/{0,1}∣J′∣: ¬ IsZeroOneVector lam.
  • The rows r,sr, sr,s range over all of {1,…,m}\{1, \dots, m\}{1,…,m}, including r=sr = sr=s, as on the page; no distinctness is assumed or required.
  • "Fractional basic solution" is any such solution, not the RMP optimum; no costs or optimality hypothesis enter.
  • The milestone reads the paragraph after Proposition 3, together with the validity requirement "integer solutions remain intact" (p. 1019), as the dichotomy for all 0/10/10/1 solutions of Aλ=1A\lambda = \mathbf 1Aλ=1. The sentence about transferring the branching information to the pricing problem is not formalized.
  • Edge cases: for m=0m = 0m=0 basicness forces λ=0\lambda = 0λ=0, and for n=0n = 0n=0 the vector is empty; in both cases no fractional basic solution exists and the goal is vacuous, as on the page.
  • A trivializing formalization is ruled out: dropping basicness makes the goal false (the [1 1][1\ 1][1 1] example above), dropping the 0/10/10/1 hypothesis on AAA changes the meaning of the quantity, and replacing "fractional basic" by an unsatisfiable hypothesis would make it empty; the hypotheses are satisfied, for instance, by three rows, the columns {1,2},{2,3},{1,3}\{1,2\}, \{2,3\}, \{1,3\}{1,2},{2,3},{1,3} and λ=(12,12,12)\lambda = (\tfrac12, \tfrac12, \tfrac12)λ=(21​,21​,21​).

A complete development needs linear-algebra facts about basic solutions of standard-form systems without a rank assumption (support columns linearly independent), which are reusable beyond this mission. Contributions welcome: that characterization as a lemma, and proofs of the milestone and of the goal.

Selected references

  • M. E. Lübbecke and J. Desrosiers, Selected Topics in Column Generation, Operations Research 53(6):1007–1023, 2005. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1050.0234
  • D. M. Ryan and B. A. Foster, An integer programming approach to scheduling, in A. Wren (ed.), Computer Scheduling of Public Transport, North-Holland, 1981, pp. 269–280.
  • C. Barnhart, E. L. Johnson, G. L. Nemhauser, M. W. P. Savelsbergh and P. H. Vance, Branch-and-Price: Column Generation for Solving Huge Integer Programs, Operations Research 46(3):316–329, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.46.3.316
  • D. Bertsimas and J. N. Tsitsiklis, Introduction to Linear Optimization, Athena Scientific, 1997, Definition 2.9.
5 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOperations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Random Gradient-Free Minimization of Convex Functions III: Accelerated Random SearchResearch Paper

Motivation

Many optimization problems in engineering, simulation-based design and machine learning give access only to function values: the objective is the output of a simulator or a black-box program, and its gradient is unavailable or too expensive. Derivative-free (or zeroth-order) methods address this setting. Nesterov and Spokoiny (Found. Comput. Math. 17 (2017)) showed that a very simple oracle, the finite difference of fff along a random Gaussian direction, can replace the gradient in standard first-order schemes at the price of a factor depending only on the dimension. Their analysis became the reference point for later work on zeroth-order stochastic optimization and on gradient-free methods in reinforcement learning and adversarial attacks.

This mission covers Section 6 of the paper: the accelerated random method FGμ\mathcal{FG}_\muFGμ​ and its rate, Theorem 9. It is the third mission of a series; the first covers random search for nonsmooth problems (Theorem 6), the second the random gradient method for smooth problems (Theorem 8).

Setting

Let EEE be a real inner product space of dimension n≥2n \ge 2n≥2 with norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥ (the paper's space with operator BBB is EEE with the inner product ⟨Bx,y⟩\langle Bx, y\rangle⟨Bx,y⟩). Let uuu be a standard Gaussian vector in EEE, and write Eu\mathbb E_uEu​ for expectation over uuu.

The objective f:E→Rf : E \to \mathbb Rf:E→R is differentiable with Lipschitz gradient, ∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤L1∥x−y∥\|\nabla f(x) - \nabla f(y)\| \le L_1\|x - y\|∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤L1​∥x−y∥ with L1>0L_1 > 0L1​>0, and strongly convex with parameter τ≥0\tau \ge 0τ≥0:

f(y)≥f(x)+⟨∇f(x),y−x⟩+τ2∥y−x∥2.f(y) \ge f(x) + \langle\nabla f(x), y - x\rangle + \tfrac{\tau}{2}\|y - x\|^2 .f(y)≥f(x)+⟨∇f(x),y−x⟩+2τ​∥y−x∥2.

The value τ=0\tau = 0τ=0 is allowed (plain convexity). The condition number is κ=τ/L1\kappa = \tau/L_1κ=τ/L1​. The problem f∗=min⁡x∈Ef(x)f^* = \min_{x \in E} f(x)f∗=minx∈E​f(x) is assumed solvable, with minimizer x∗x^*x∗.

For μ≥0\mu \ge 0μ≥0 the Gaussian approximation is fμ(x)=Euf(x+μu)f_\mu(x) = \mathbb E_u f(x + \mu u)fμ​(x)=Eu​f(x+μu), and the random gradient-free oracle is

B−1gμ(x)=f(x+μu)−f(x)μ u(μ>0),B−1g0(x)=⟨∇f(x),u⟩ u.B^{-1}g_\mu(x) = \frac{f(x + \mu u) - f(x)}{\mu}\,u \quad (\mu > 0), \qquad B^{-1}g_0(x) = \langle\nabla f(x), u\rangle\,u .B−1gμ​(x)=μf(x+μu)−f(x)​u(μ>0),B−1g0​(x)=⟨∇f(x),u⟩u.

The paper (p. 548) sets θn=1/(16(n+1)2L1(f))\theta_n = 1/(16(n+1)^2L_1(f))θn​=1/(16(n+1)2L1​(f)) and hn=1/(4(n+4)L1(f))h_n = 1/(4(n+4)L_1(f))hn​=1/(4(n+4)L1​(f)). This mission uses θn=1/(16(n+4)2L1)\theta_n = 1/(16(n+4)^2L_1)θn​=1/(16(n+4)2L1​); the reason is given under Formalization scope. Method FGμ\mathcal{FG}_\muFGμ​ (Eq. (60)) chooses x0∈Ex_0 \in Ex0​∈E, v0=x0v_0 = x_0v0​=x0​ and γ0>0\gamma_0 > 0γ0​>0 with γ0≥τ\gamma_0 \ge \tauγ0​≥τ, and at every iteration k≥0k \ge 0k≥0:

  1. computes αk>0\alpha_k > 0αk​>0 with θn−1αk2=(1−αk)γk+αkτ≡γk+1\theta_n^{-1}\alpha_k^2 = (1 - \alpha_k)\gamma_k + \alpha_k\tau \equiv \gamma_{k+1}θn−1​αk2​=(1−αk​)γk​+αk​τ≡γk+1​;
  2. sets λk=αkτ/γk+1\lambda_k = \alpha_k\tau/\gamma_{k+1}λk​=αk​τ/γk+1​, βk=αkγk/(γk+αkτ)\beta_k = \alpha_k\gamma_k/(\gamma_k + \alpha_k\tau)βk​=αk​γk​/(γk​+αk​τ) and yk=(1−βk)xk+βkvky_k = (1-\beta_k)x_k + \beta_k v_kyk​=(1−βk​)xk​+βk​vk​;
  3. draws a fresh Gaussian direction uku_kuk​, independent of the past, and computes gμ(yk)g_\mu(y_k)gμ​(yk​);
  4. sets xk+1=yk−hnB−1gμ(yk)x_{k+1} = y_k - h_n B^{-1}g_\mu(y_k)xk+1​=yk​−hn​B−1gμ​(yk​) and vk+1=(1−λk)vk+λkyk−(θn/αk)B−1gμ(yk)v_{k+1} = (1-\lambda_k)v_k + \lambda_k y_k - (\theta_n/\alpha_k)B^{-1}g_\mu(y_k)vk+1​=(1−λk​)vk​+λk​yk​−(θn​/αk​)B−1gμ​(yk​).

Write ϕk=Ef(xk)\phi_k = \mathbb E f(x_k)ϕk​=Ef(xk​) (expectation over u0,…,uk−1u_0, \dots, u_{k-1}u0​,…,uk−1​), ψk=∏i=0k−1(1−αi)\psi_k = \prod_{i=0}^{k-1}(1-\alpha_i)ψk​=∏i=0k−1​(1−αi​) and Ck=1+∑i=1k−1∏j=k−ik−1(1−αj)C_k = 1 + \sum_{i=1}^{k-1}\prod_{j=k-i}^{k-1}(1-\alpha_j)Ck​=1+∑i=1k−1​∏j=k−ik−1​(1−αj​) for k≥1k \ge 1k≥1, with ψ0=1\psi_0 = 1ψ0​=1 and C0=0C_0 = 0C0​=0 (p. 550).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 9 (p. 549)

For all k≥0k \ge 0k≥0,

ϕk−f∗≤ψk[f(x0)−f(x∗)+γ02∥x0−x∗∥2]+μ2L1(n+3(n+8)16Ck),(62)\phi_k - f^* \le \psi_k\Big[f(x_0) - f(x^*) + \frac{\gamma_0}{2}\|x_0 - x^*\|^2\Big] + \mu^2 L_1\Big(n + \frac{3(n+8)}{16}C_k\Big), \tag{62}ϕk​−f∗≤ψk​[f(x0​)−f(x∗)+2γ0​​∥x0​−x∗∥2]+μ2L1​(n+163(n+8)​Ck​),(62)

where

ψk≤min⁡{(1−κ1/24(n+4))k, (1+k8(n+4)γ0L1)−2},Ck≤min⁡{k, 4(n+4)κ1/2}.\psi_k \le \min\Big\{\Big(1 - \frac{\kappa^{1/2}}{4(n+4)}\Big)^k,\ \Big(1 + \frac{k}{8(n+4)}\sqrt{\frac{\gamma_0}{L_1}}\Big)^{-2}\Big\}, \qquad C_k \le \min\Big\{k,\ \frac{4(n+4)}{\kappa^{1/2}}\Big\}.ψk​≤min{(1−4(n+4)κ1/2​)k, (1+8(n+4)k​L1​γ0​​​)−2},Ck​≤min{k, κ1/24(n+4)​}.

The two regimes are a rate O(n2/k2)O(n^2/k^2)O(n2/k2) for convex fff and a linear rate with ratio 1−κ1/2/(4(n+4))1 - \kappa^{1/2}/(4(n+4))1−κ1/2/(4(n+4)) for strongly convex fff, both up to a bias proportional to μ2\mu^2μ2.

Milestones

In attack order: Lemma 1 (Gaussian moments, (16)–(17)); Theorem 3.1 (the bound (32) on the second moment of g0g_0g0​); Theorem 1's (19), ∣fμ−f∣≤μ22L1n|f_\mu - f| \le \frac{\mu^2}{2}L_1 n∣fμ​−f∣≤2μ2​L1​n; Eq. (12), L1(fμ)≤L1(f)L_1(f_\mu) \le L_1(f)L1​(fμ​)≤L1​(f); Lemma 5, the bound (37) on Eu∥gμ(x)∥∗2\mathbb E_u\|g_\mu(x)\|_*^2Eu​∥gμ​(x)∥∗2​ in terms of ∇fμ(x)\nabla f_\mu(x)∇fμ​(x); Eq. (21), ∇fμ=Eugμ\nabla f_\mu = \mathbb E_u g_\mu∇fμ​=Eu​gμ​; and Eq. (11), fμ≥ff_\mu \ge ffμ​≥f for convex fff.

Significance

Theorem 9 shows that the nnn-fold slowdown of gradient-free methods relative to their gradient counterparts survives acceleration: FGμ\mathcal{FG}_\muFGμ​ reaches accuracy ϵ\epsilonϵ in O(nL11/2R/ϵ1/2)O(n L_1^{1/2}R/\epsilon^{1/2})O(nL11/2​R/ϵ1/2) iterations for convex fff, against O(nL1R2/ϵ)O(nL_1R^2/\epsilon)O(nL1​R2/ϵ) for the non-accelerated random gradient method. The analysis also quantifies how small the finite-difference step μ\muμ must be for this to hold. The result is used as the baseline accelerated zeroth-order rate in later work.

The theorem is proved in the paper. As far as is known it has not been machine-checked, and Mathlib has no Gaussian smoothing, no random gradient-free oracle and no analysis of an accelerated method driven by random directions. A formal proof also settles the constant question raised by the printed θn\theta_nθn​ (see below).

Difficulty

The deterministic fast gradient method is analysed by an estimate-sequence argument in which the gradient step is exact. Here the step uses gμ(yk)g_\mu(y_k)gμ​(yk​), which is an unbiased estimate of ∇fμ(yk)\nabla f_\mu(y_k)∇fμ​(yk​) and not of ∇f(yk)\nabla f(y_k)∇f(yk​), and whose second moment is of order n∥∇fμ∥2n\|\nabla f_\mu\|^2n∥∇fμ​∥2 plus a bias term. The step size and the coupling parameter θn\theta_nθn​ must absorb this second moment, and the argument must be run for fμf_\mufμ​ rather than fff. The estimate sequence then has to be passed through expectations over the history u0,…,uk−1u_0, \dots, u_{k-1}u0​,…,uk−1​, which requires the independence of uku_kuk​ from xk,vk,ykx_k, v_k, y_kxk​,vk​,yk​ and integrability of every quantity involved. Transporting the result from fμf_\mufμ​ back to fff uses (11) and (19), and requires that fμf_\mufμ​ inherits strong convexity with the same parameter τ\tauτ, a fact the paper uses without stating it.

Formalization scope

EEE is an arbitrary finite-dimensional real inner product space (InnerProductSpace ℝ E, FiniteDimensional ℝ E, Borel measurable), nnn is Module.finrank ℝ E, and the Gaussian is Mathlib's stdGaussian E. The operator BBB is absorbed into the inner product, so ∇f\nabla f∇f is gradient f and B−1gμB^{-1}g_\muB−1gμ​ is f(x+μu)−f(x)μu\frac{f(x+\mu u)-f(x)}{\mu}uμf(x+μu)−f(x)​u. This is not a restriction to B=IB = IB=I on Rn\mathbb R^nRn. All expectations are Bochner integrals; under the hypotheses every integrand is integrable, so no integrability hypothesis is added.

The run is a structure over a probability space (Ω,P)(\Omega, \mathbb P)(Ω,P): directions uku_kuk​ that are measurable, mutually independent (iIndepFun) and standard Gaussian; deterministic sequences γ,α\gamma, \alphaγ,α satisfying step a) as equations; and random points xk,vkx_k, v_kxk​,vk​ satisfying steps b)–d) for every outcome. The smoothing parameter satisfies μ≥0\mu \ge 0μ≥0, and at μ=0\mu = 0μ=0 the oracle is g0g_0g0​. The goal pins θ=1/(16(n+4)2L1)\theta = 1/(16(n+4)^2L_1)θ=1/(16(n+4)2L1​) and h=1/(4(n+4)L1)h = 1/(4(n+4)L_1)h=1/(4(n+4)L1​). ψk\psi_kψk​ and CkC_kCk​ are definitions computed from α\alphaα.

The constant θn\theta_nθn​. The paper prints θn=116(n+1)2L1(f)\theta_n = \frac{1}{16(n+1)^2L_1(f)}θn​=16(n+1)2L1​(f)1​. The proof (pp. 549–550) needs hn4(n+4)−hn2L12=132(n+4)2L1=θn2\frac{h_n}{4(n+4)} - \frac{h_n^2L_1}{2} = \frac{1}{32(n+4)^2L_1} = \frac{\theta_n}{2}4(n+4)hn​​−2hn2​L1​​=32(n+4)2L1​1​=2θn​​, αk≥[τθn]1/2=κ1/24(n+4)\alpha_k \ge [\tau\theta_n]^{1/2} = \frac{\kappa^{1/2}}{4(n+4)}αk​≥[τθn​]1/2=4(n+4)κ1/2​ and θn1/2=14(n+4)L11/2\theta_n^{1/2} = \frac{1}{4(n+4)L_1^{1/2}}θn1/2​=4(n+4)L11/2​1​, which hold only with (n+4)(n+4)(n+4). With the printed value θn\theta_nθn​ is larger than the first inequality allows, and the argument does not go through. The mission therefore states Theorem 9 with θn=116(n+4)2L1\theta_n = \frac{1}{16(n+4)^2L_1}θn​=16(n+4)2L1​1​; all other constants are as printed.

Two trivializing formalizations are ruled out. First, the bound Ck≤4(n+4)/κ1/2C_k \le 4(n+4)/\kappa^{1/2}Ck​≤4(n+4)/κ1/2 carries the hypothesis τ>0\tau > 0τ>0: at τ=0\tau = 0τ=0 the paper's value is +∞+\infty+∞, while Lean's division by zero would turn it into Ck≤0C_k \le 0Ck​≤0, which is false. ψk\psi_kψk​ and CkC_kCk​ are definitions from the run, not free variables that only satisfy the bounds. Second, the oracle is the random finite difference along i.i.d. standard Gaussian directions, not the exact gradient (which would give Nesterov's deterministic method) and not an arbitrary direction sequence.

A complete development needs Gaussian integration by parts in an inner product space, moment bounds for ∥u∥\|u\|∥u∥, differentiation under the integral sign for fμf_\mufμ​, and conditional expectation along an i.i.d. sequence. The smoothing layer (Lemma 1, (11), (12), (19), (21), (32), (37)) is reusable for any zeroth-order method, and contributions of these components as separate lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • Yu. Nesterov, V. Spokoiny, Random Gradient-Free Minimization of Convex Functions, Foundations of Computational Mathematics 17(2):527–566, 2017. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10208-015-9296-2
  • Yu. Nesterov, Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization: A Basic Course, Kluwer, 2004 (Lemma 2.2.4 and Section 2.2.1, the estimate-sequence analysis the proof of Theorem 9 follows). https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4419-8853-9
14 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOperations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Random Gradient-Free Minimization of Convex Functions II: Random Gradient Descent for Smooth and Strongly Convex ProblemsResearch Paper

Motivation

Many optimization problems in engineering, simulation-based design and machine learning give access to the objective only through its values: the function is computed by a black-box code, and derivatives are unavailable or too expensive to program. Zeroth-order (derivative-free) methods address this setting. Classical derivative-free methods (pattern search, Nelder–Mead, model-based trust regions) come with weak or no global complexity guarantees for convex problems.

Nesterov and Spokoiny (Found. Comput. Math. 17 (2017) 527–566) showed that replacing the gradient by a finite difference along a random Gaussian direction yields methods whose expected complexity is that of the corresponding gradient method multiplied by a factor proportional to the dimension. Their paper is a standard reference for zeroth-order convex optimization and for Gaussian smoothing, and its oracle and analysis are reused in bandit convex optimization, zeroth-order stochastic optimization (e.g. Ghadimi–Lan 2013) and derivative-free reinforcement learning.

This mission concerns Section 5 of the paper: the random gradient method RGμ\mathcal{RG}_\muRGμ​ for smooth convex functions and its linear rate for strongly convex ones.

Setting

Let EEE be a real inner product space of finite dimension nnn, with norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. (The paper works with a space carrying an operator B=B∗≻0B = B^* \succ 0B=B∗≻0 and norm ∥x∥=⟨Bx,x⟩1/2\|x\| = \langle Bx, x\rangle^{1/2}∥x∥=⟨Bx,x⟩1/2; choosing ⟨B⋅,⋅⟩\langle B\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨B⋅,⋅⟩ as the inner product gives exactly this setting, and the dual norm ∥⋅∥∗\|\cdot\|_*∥⋅∥∗​ becomes the norm of the Riesz representative.)

A function f:E→Rf : E \to \mathbb Rf:E→R belongs to C1,1(E)C^{1,1}(E)C1,1(E) with constant L1L_1L1​ if it is differentiable and ∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤L1∥x−y∥\|\nabla f(x) - \nabla f(y)\| \le L_1\|x - y\|∥∇f(x)−∇f(y)∥≤L1​∥x−y∥ for all x,yx, yx,y. It is strongly convex with parameter τ>0\tau > 0τ>0 if f(y)≥f(x)+⟨∇f(x),y−x⟩+τ2∥y−x∥2f(y) \ge f(x) + \langle \nabla f(x), y - x\rangle + \frac{\tau}{2}\|y-x\|^2f(y)≥f(x)+⟨∇f(x),y−x⟩+2τ​∥y−x∥2 for all x,yx, yx,y.

Let uuu be a standard Gaussian vector of EEE (coordinates in any orthonormal basis are independent N(0,1)N(0,1)N(0,1)). The Gaussian approximation of fff with parameter μ≥0\mu \ge 0μ≥0 is fμ(x)=Euf(x+μu)f_\mu(x) = \mathbb E_u f(x + \mu u)fμ​(x)=Eu​f(x+μu), and the moments are Mp=Eu∥u∥pM_p = \mathbb E_u\|u\|^pMp​=Eu​∥u∥p. The random gradient-free oracle returns, for a sampled direction uuu,

B−1gμ(x)=f(x+μu)−f(x)μ u(μ>0),B−1g0(x)=f′(x,u) u,B^{-1}g_\mu(x) = \frac{f(x+\mu u) - f(x)}{\mu}\, u \quad (\mu > 0), \qquad B^{-1}g_0(x) = f'(x,u)\, u,B−1gμ​(x)=μf(x+μu)−f(x)​u(μ>0),B−1g0​(x)=f′(x,u)u,

and the symmetric oracle is B−1g^μ(x)=f(x+μu)−f(x−μu)2μuB^{-1}\hat g_\mu(x) = \frac{f(x+\mu u) - f(x - \mu u)}{2\mu}uB−1g^​μ​(x)=2μf(x+μu)−f(x−μu)​u.

Consider f∗=min⁡x∈Ef(x)f^* = \min_{x\in E} f(x)f∗=minx∈E​f(x) for a convex f∈C1,1(E)f \in C^{1,1}(E)f∈C1,1(E), assumed solvable with a minimizer x∗x^*x∗, and n≥2n \ge 2n≥2. The random gradient method RGμ\mathcal{RG}_\muRGμ​ (Eq. (54), p. 546) is:

Method RGμ\mathcal{RG}_\muRGμ​: Choose x0∈Ex_0 \in Ex0​∈E. Iteration k≥0k \ge 0k≥0. a). Generate uku_kuk​ and corresponding gμ(xk)g_\mu(x_k)gμ​(xk​). b). Compute xk+1=xk−hB−1gμ(xk)x_{k+1} = x_k - hB^{-1}g_\mu(x_k)xk+1​=xk​−hB−1gμ​(xk​).

The directions u0,u1,…u_0, u_1, \dotsu0​,u1​,… are independent standard Gaussian vectors, and ϕk=Ef(xk)\phi_k = \mathbb E f(x_k)ϕk​=Ef(xk​) (with ϕ0=f(x0)\phi_0 = f(x_0)ϕ0​=f(x0​)).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 8 (p. 546)

With step size h=14(n+4)L1h = \frac{1}{4(n+4)L_1}h=4(n+4)L1​1​ and any μ≥0\mu \ge 0μ≥0, for every N≥0N \ge 0N≥0,

1N+1∑k=0N(ϕk−f∗)≤4(n+4)L1∥x0−x∗∥2N+1+9μ2(n+4)2L125,\frac{1}{N+1}\sum_{k=0}^{N}(\phi_k - f^*) \le \frac{4(n+4)L_1\|x_0-x^*\|^2}{N+1} + \frac{9\mu^2(n+4)^2L_1}{25},N+11​k=0∑N​(ϕk​−f∗)≤N+14(n+4)L1​∥x0​−x∗∥2​+259μ2(n+4)2L1​​,

and, if fff is strongly convex with parameter τ>0\tau > 0τ>0, then with δμ=18μ2(n+4)225τL1\delta_\mu = \frac{18\mu^2(n+4)^2}{25\tau}L_1δμ​=25τ18μ2(n+4)2​L1​,

ϕN−f∗≤12L1[δμ+(1−τ8(n+4)L1)N(∥x0−x∗∥2−δμ)].\phi_N - f^* \le \frac12 L_1\left[\delta_\mu + \left(1 - \frac{\tau}{8(n+4)L_1}\right)^{N}\big(\|x_0-x^*\|^2 - \delta_\mu\big)\right].ϕN​−f∗≤21​L1​[δμ​+(1−8(n+4)L1​τ​)N(∥x0​−x∗∥2−δμ​)].

Both bounds are one theorem with one proof in the paper, so the goal states their conjunction, with every constant as printed.

Milestones

The milestones are the results the paper's proof of Theorem 8 rests on, in attack order:

  1. Lemma 1 (p. 534): Mp≤np/2M_p \le n^{p/2}Mp​≤np/2 for p∈[0,2]p \in [0,2]p∈[0,2] and np/2≤Mp≤(p+n)p/2n^{p/2} \le M_p \le (p+n)^{p/2}np/2≤Mp​≤(p+n)p/2 for p≥2p \ge 2p≥2.
  2. Theorem 3.1, (32) (p. 537): Eu∥g0(x)∥∗2≤(n+4)∥∇f(x)∥∗2\mathbb E_u\|g_0(x)\|_*^2 \le (n+4)\|\nabla f(x)\|_*^2Eu​∥g0​(x)∥∗2​≤(n+4)∥∇f(x)∥∗2​ at a point of differentiability.
  3. Theorem 4.2, (35) (p. 538): Eu∥gμ(x)∥∗2≤μ22L12(n+6)3+2(n+4)∥∇f(x)∥∗2\mathbb E_u\|g_\mu(x)\|_*^2 \le \frac{\mu^2}{2}L_1^2(n+6)^3 + 2(n+4)\|\nabla f(x)\|_*^2Eu​∥gμ​(x)∥∗2​≤2μ2​L12​(n+6)3+2(n+4)∥∇f(x)∥∗2​, and the same with μ28\frac{\mu^2}{8}8μ2​ for g^μ\hat g_\mug^​μ​.
  4. Eq. (21) (pp. 534–535): for μ>0\mu > 0μ>0, fμf_\mufμ​ is differentiable with ∇fμ(x)=EuB−1gμ(x)\nabla f_\mu(x) = \mathbb E_u B^{-1}g_\mu(x)∇fμ​(x)=Eu​B−1gμ​(x).
  5. Eq. (25) (p. 535): Eu⟨∇f(x),u⟩u=∇f(x)\mathbb E_u \langle\nabla f(x), u\rangle u = \nabla f(x)Eu​⟨∇f(x),u⟩u=∇f(x), the μ=0\mu = 0μ=0 counterpart.
  6. Convexity of fμf_\mufμ​ (p. 533) and Eq. (11): f≤fμf \le f_\muf≤fμ​ for convex fff.
  7. Theorem 1, (19) (p. 534): ∣fμ(x)−f(x)∣≤μ22L1n|f_\mu(x) - f(x)| \le \frac{\mu^2}{2}L_1 n∣fμ​(x)−f(x)∣≤2μ2​L1​n.

Significance

The result. Theorem 8 shows that a method using two function values per iteration reaches accuracy ϵ\epsilonϵ on a smooth convex problem in O(nϵL1∥x0−x∗∥2)O(\frac{n}{\epsilon}L_1\|x_0 - x^*\|^2)O(ϵn​L1​∥x0​−x∗∥2) iterations, and in O(nL1τln⁡L1∥x0−x∗∥2ϵ)O(\frac{nL_1}{\tau}\ln\frac{L_1\|x_0-x^*\|^2}{\epsilon})O(τnL1​​lnϵL1​∥x0​−x∗∥2​) iterations under strong convexity, provided μ\muμ is small enough. This is nnn times the complexity of the deterministic gradient method, which is the natural price for replacing an nnn-dimensional gradient by one directional estimate. The strongly convex bound makes explicit the bias floor 12L1δμ\frac12 L_1\delta_\mu21​L1​δμ​ caused by the finite-difference step, and shows that it vanishes for the limiting method RG0\mathcal{RG}_0RG0​.

Formalizing it. The result is proved in the paper; nothing here is open. To our knowledge none of it has a machine-checked proof. A formalization produces a reusable Gaussian-smoothing layer on Mathlib's stdGaussian (moments of the Gaussian norm, differentiation of fμf_\mufμ​ under the integral, variance bounds of random oracles) and a complete expected-complexity proof of a randomized first-order method, in which the probabilistic structure (independent directions, iterates depending only on past directions, tower property) has to be handled explicitly.

Difficulty

The deterministic part of the argument is the textbook analysis of gradient descent. The difficulty is in the Gaussian facts it uses. The obvious bound on the oracle's second moment, E⟨∇f(x),u⟩2∥u∥2≤∥∇f(x)∥2M4≤(n+4)2∥∇f(x)∥2\mathbb E\langle\nabla f(x),u\rangle^2\|u\|^2 \le \|\nabla f(x)\|^2 M_4 \le (n+4)^2\|\nabla f(x)\|^2E⟨∇f(x),u⟩2∥u∥2≤∥∇f(x)∥2M4​≤(n+4)2∥∇f(x)∥2, loses a factor of nnn and would give a quadratic dependence on dimension; the (n+4)(n+4)(n+4) of (32) needs a sharper computation. The moment bounds of Lemma 1 for non-integer ppp and the differentiation under the integral in (21) are measure-theoretic steps that Mathlib does not package. Finally, the step from per-iteration inequalities to bounds on ϕk\phi_kϕk​ requires conditioning on the past directions, which must be set up on a probability space carrying the whole sequence u0,u1,…u_0, u_1, \dotsu0​,u1​,….

Formalization scope

EEE is an arbitrary finite-dimensional real inner product space with MeasurableSpace and BorelSpace, nnn is Module.finrank ℝ E, and ∇f\nabla f∇f is Mathlib's gradient. Expectations over uuu are Bochner integrals against ProbabilityTheory.stdGaussian E. A run of RGμ\mathcal{RG}_\muRGμ​ lives on a probability space (Ω,P)(\Omega, P)(Ω,P): measurable directions uku_kuk​, jointly independent (iIndepFun) with law stdGaussian E, iterates with x0x_0x0​ deterministic and the update holding for every kkk and outcome. ϕk\phi_kϕk​ is ∫ ω, f (x k ω) ∂P. The oracle is defined by cases, with f′(x,u)uf'(x,u)uf′(x,u)u at μ=0\mu = 0μ=0 (f′(x,u)f'(x,u)f′(x,u) the one-sided directional derivative of Eq. (23), a Filter.limUnder, which equals fderiv ℝ f x u for differentiable fff), so the goal covers every μ≥0\mu \ge 0μ≥0 as the paper claims. L1L_1L1​ and τ\tauτ are any constants satisfying the defining inequalities. The standing assumptions of Section 5 (convexity, a global minimizer x∗x^*x∗, n≥2n \ge 2n≥2) and L1>0L_1 > 0L1​>0 are explicit hypotheses; n≥2n \ge 2n≥2 is needed for the constant 9/259/259/25.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the oracle is the random finite difference along i.i.d. standard Gaussian directions, not the true gradient (which would be deterministic gradient descent), and every expectation in the statements is of a quantity that is integrable under the stated hypotheses, so no bound holds through a junk value of a non-integrable integral.

A complete development needs Gaussian moment computations in finite dimension, differentiation under the integral sign for fμf_\mufμ​, the variance bounds of the oracles, and a conditional-expectation argument for the iteration. The smoothing layer is reusable for the companion missions on random search for nonsmooth problems and on the accelerated random method, and for other zeroth-order methods. Contributions of any of the milestones, of general Gaussian-integrability lemmas, or of alternative proofs are welcome.

Selected references

  • Yu. Nesterov, V. Spokoiny, Random Gradient-Free Minimization of Convex Functions, Foundations of Computational Mathematics 17(2):527–566, 2017. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10208-015-9296-2
  • S. Ghadimi, G. Lan, Stochastic First- and Zeroth-Order Methods for Nonconvex Stochastic Programming, SIAM Journal on Optimization 23(4):2341–2368, 2013. https://doi.org/10.1137/120880811
  • Yu. Nesterov, Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization: A Basic Course, Kluwer, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4419-8853-9
14 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOperations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Random Gradient-Free Minimization of Convex Functions I: Random Search for Nonsmooth Convex ProblemsResearch Paper

Motivation

Many optimization problems in engineering, simulation-based design and machine learning give access to the values of an objective function but not to its gradient: the function is computed by a black-box program, by a simulator, or by a model whose derivatives are unavailable or too expensive. Zeroth-order (or derivative-free) methods use only function values. Classical direct-search methods of this kind usually come without complexity bounds.

Nesterov and Spokoiny (Found. Comput. Math. 17 (2017) 527–566) showed that a very simple randomized scheme has explicit, dimension-dependent worst-case complexity bounds. The idea is to replace the gradient by a finite difference of fff along a random Gaussian direction. The resulting oracle is an unbiased estimate of the gradient of a smoothed version of fff. Their analysis is the reference point for the later literature on zeroth-order stochastic optimization, bandit convex optimization and gradient-free training.

This mission covers the paper's result for nonsmooth convex problems over a closed convex set: the projected random search method RSμ\mathcal{RS}_\muRSμ​ and its convergence bound, Theorem 6.

Setting

Let EEE be a real inner product space of finite dimension nnn, with norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥. (The paper works with a space carrying a positive definite operator BBB and the norm ⟨Bx,x⟩1/2\langle Bx, x\rangle^{1/2}⟨Bx,x⟩1/2. This is the same thing as an arbitrary finite-dimensional inner product space, with BBB encoding the inner product, and the development is written in that generality.)

A function f:E→Rf : E \to \mathbb Rf:E→R is Lipschitz continuous with constant L0≥0L_0 \ge 0L0​≥0 if ∣f(x)−f(y)∣≤L0∥x−y∥|f(x) - f(y)| \le L_0 \|x - y\|∣f(x)−f(y)∣≤L0​∥x−y∥ for all x,yx, yx,y. The paper calls this class C0,0(E)C^{0,0}(E)C0,0(E) and writes L0(f)L_0(f)L0​(f) for the constant.

Let uuu be a standard Gaussian vector in EEE: its coordinates in any orthonormal basis are independent N(0,1)N(0,1)N(0,1) variables. For μ≥0\mu \ge 0μ≥0 the Gaussian smoothing of fff is

fμ(x)=Eu f(x+μu),f_\mu(x) = \mathbb E_u\, f(x + \mu u),fμ​(x)=Eu​f(x+μu),

and the Gaussian moments are Mp=Eu∥u∥pM_p = \mathbb E_u \|u\|^pMp​=Eu​∥u∥p.

For μ>0\mu > 0μ>0 the random gradient-free oracle at xxx draws uuu and returns the vector

gμ(x)=f(x+μu)−f(x)μ u.g_\mu(x) = \frac{f(x+\mu u) - f(x)}{\mu}\, u .gμ​(x)=μf(x+μu)−f(x)​u.

It costs two function values.

The problem is

f∗=min⁡x∈Qf(x),f^* = \min_{x \in Q} f(x),f∗=x∈Qmin​f(x),

where Q⊆EQ \subseteq EQ⊆E is closed and convex, fff is convex and Lipschitz, and x∗∈Qx^* \in Qx∗∈Q is a minimizer. With πQ\pi_QπQ​ the Euclidean projection onto QQQ, positive steps h0,h1,…h_0, h_1, \ldotsh0​,h1​,… and a starting point x0∈Qx_0 \in Qx0​∈Q, the random search method RSμ\mathcal{RS}_\muRSμ​ iterates

xk+1=πQ(xk−hk gμ(xk)),x_{k+1} = \pi_Q\big(x_k - h_k\, g_\mu(x_k)\big),xk+1​=πQ​(xk​−hk​gμ​(xk​)),

drawing a fresh independent Gaussian direction uku_kuk​ at every iteration. The iterates are random. Write ϕk=Ef(xk)\phi_k = \mathbb E f(x_k)ϕk​=Ef(xk​) and SN=∑k=0NhkS_N = \sum_{k=0}^N h_kSN​=∑k=0N​hk​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6

For every N≥0N \ge 0N≥0,

1SN∑k=0Nhk(ϕk−f∗)≤μL0 n1/2+1SN[12∥x0−x∗∥2+(n+4)22L02∑k=0Nhk2].\frac{1}{S_N}\sum_{k=0}^{N} h_k(\phi_k - f^*) \le \mu L_0\, n^{1/2} + \frac{1}{S_N}\left[\frac12\|x_0 - x^*\|^2 + \frac{(n+4)^2}{2} L_0^2 \sum_{k=0}^{N} h_k^2\right].SN​1​k=0∑N​hk​(ϕk​−f∗)≤μL0​n1/2+SN​1​[21​∥x0​−x∗∥2+2(n+4)2​L02​k=0∑N​hk2​].

The step sizes, the smoothing parameter and the horizon are left free, so every step-size rule in the paper follows from this one inequality. The constants are the paper's.

Milestones

The facts about smoothing and the oracle on which the goal rests, in the paper's order:

  1. Lemma 1: Mp≤np/2M_p \le n^{p/2}Mp​≤np/2 for p∈[0,2]p \in [0,2]p∈[0,2] and np/2≤Mp≤(p+n)p/2n^{p/2} \le M_p \le (p+n)^{p/2}np/2≤Mp​≤(p+n)p/2 for p≥2p \ge 2p≥2.
  2. Theorem 1 (18): ∣fμ(x)−f(x)∣≤μL0n1/2|f_\mu(x) - f(x)| \le \mu L_0 n^{1/2}∣fμ​(x)−f(x)∣≤μL0​n1/2.
  3. Convexity of fμf_\mufμ​ for convex fff.
  4. Eq. (11): fμ≥ff_\mu \ge ffμ​≥f for convex fff.
  5. Eq. (21): ∇fμ(x)=Eu gμ(x)\nabla f_\mu(x) = \mathbb E_u\, g_\mu(x)∇fμ​(x)=Eu​gμ​(x) for μ>0\mu > 0μ>0.
  6. Theorem 4.1 (34): Eu∥gμ(x)∥2≤L02(n+4)2\mathbb E_u \|g_\mu(x)\|^2 \le L_0^2 (n+4)^2Eu​∥gμ​(x)∥2≤L02​(n+4)2.
  7. Theorem 2 (μ≥0\mu \ge 0μ≥0): f(y)≥f(x)−μL0n1/2+⟨∇fμ(x),y−x⟩f(y) \ge f(x) - \mu L_0 n^{1/2} + \langle \nabla f_\mu(x), y - x\ranglef(y)≥f(x)−μL0​n1/2+⟨∇fμ​(x),y−x⟩ for all yyy, where at μ=0\mu = 0μ=0 the vector is the limiting ∇f0(x)=Eu[f′(x,u) u]\nabla f_0(x) = \mathbb E_u[f'(x,u)\,u]∇f0​(x)=Eu​[f′(x,u)u] of Eq. (24).

Significance

Theorem 6 shows that a method using only function values, with no subgradient, solves nonsmooth convex problems with the classical projected-subgradient guarantee. Two things change: L02L_0^2L02​ is multiplied by (n+4)2(n+4)^2(n+4)2, and a bias μL0n1/2\mu L_0 n^{1/2}μL0​n1/2 appears, which can be made as small as desired. With suitable μ\muμ, hkh_khk​ and NNN an ϵ\epsilonϵ-accurate expected value is reached in O(n2L02R2/ϵ2)O(n^2 L_0^2 R^2/\epsilon^2)O(n2L02​R2/ϵ2) oracle calls. The factor n2n^2n2 quantifies the cost of not having gradients. The same analysis carries over to stochastic objectives (the paper's Theorem 7).

The results are proved in the paper. As far as is known, none of them has a machine-checked proof. The mission produces a Lean development of Gaussian smoothing on an arbitrary finite-dimensional inner product space: the moment bounds, the approximation, convexity and gradient identities, and the oracle variance bound. On top of it sits the full convergence theorem for a randomized projected method, stated for the actual random process rather than for an idealized expectation recursion. The smoothing layer is reusable: the same facts underlie the smooth and accelerated random methods of the same paper and most Gaussian-smoothing analyses in zeroth-order optimization.

Difficulty

A plain subgradient analysis does not apply. The vector gμ(xk)g_\mu(x_k)gμ​(xk​) is not a subgradient of fff, nor an unbiased estimate of one. It is an unbiased estimate of the gradient of a different function, fμf_\mufμ​, and its second moment grows with the dimension. The argument therefore has to move between fff and fμf_\mufμ​ at exactly the right places, using properties of fμf_\mufμ​ that hold for every nonsmooth Lipschitz fff.

Those properties are genuinely analytic. Differentiating fμf_\mufμ​ requires differentiating a Gaussian integral of a function that need not be differentiable. The moment bounds need estimates of E∥u∥p\mathbb E\|u\|^pE∥u∥p for real ppp. In the probabilistic part, xkx_kxk​ depends on u0,…,uk−1u_0, \ldots, u_{k-1}u0​,…,uk−1​, and each one-step estimate has to be integrated using the independence of uku_kuk​ from the past. Mathlib provides the standard Gaussian measure and independence, but no Gaussian smoothing, no projection onto convex sets and no conditional-expectation argument for this kind of recursion.

Formalization scope

The space is E with [NormedAddCommGroup E] [InnerProductSpace ℝ E] [FiniteDimensional ℝ E] [MeasurableSpace E] [BorelSpace E], and nnn is Module.finrank ℝ E. No lower bound on nnn is assumed. The Gaussian is ProbabilityTheory.stdGaussian E, and expectations are Bochner integrals against it. fμf_\mufμ​ is the definition smoothing, MpM_pMp​ is moment (with real exponent Real.rpow), and gμg_\mugμ​ is oracle.

The projection is the relation IsMetricProjection Q y z (z∈Qz \in Qz∈Q and zzz is a nearest point of QQQ to yyy). The run is the predicate IsRandomSearchRun: directions uk:Ω→Eu_k : \Omega \to Euk​:Ω→E on a probability space (Ω,P)(\Omega, P)(Ω,P), measurable, mutually independent (iIndepFun) and each with law stdGaussian E; a deterministic x0∈Qx_0 \in Qx0​∈Q; and the update above for every kkk and every outcome.

ϕk\phi_kϕk​ is ∫f(xk) dP\int f(x_k)\,dP∫f(xk​)dP. The Lipschitz constant L0≥0L_0 \ge 0L0​≥0 is any constant satisfying the Lipschitz inequality. It is an explicit hypothesis, because the paper's bound uses L0(f)L_0(f)L0​(f), which presupposes f∈C0,0(E)f \in C^{0,0}(E)f∈C0,0(E). The smoothing parameter satisfies μ>0\mu > 0μ>0 and every step satisfies hk>0h_k > 0hk​>0.

Two trivializing formalizations are ruled out. First, an expectation of a non-integrable function would be 000 as a Bochner integral; Lipschitz continuity of fff makes every expectation in the mission integrable, and no statement relies on the junk value. Second, a run whose directions are not independent standard Gaussians, or whose update uses a subgradient instead of the finite difference, is a different theorem (the projected subgradient method). The run predicate fixes the paper's process exactly. A run exists for every closed QQQ containing x0x_0x0​ (on the countable product of Gaussians), so the goal is not vacuous.

A complete development needs:

  • Gaussian integration by parts, or differentiation under the integral, for Lipschitz integrands;
  • moment estimates for the standard Gaussian norm;
  • existence and nonexpansiveness of projections onto closed convex sets;
  • an expectation argument for the random recursion.

The smoothing lemmas, the moment bounds and the projection facts are reusable beyond this mission. Contributions are welcome at every level: proofs of the milestones, general lemmas about stdGaussian and projections, and alternative proofs of Lemma 1 (for example through the chi distribution).

Selected references

  • Yu. Nesterov, V. Spokoiny, Random Gradient-Free Minimization of Convex Functions, Foundations of Computational Mathematics 17(2):527–566, 2017. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10208-015-9296-2
  • Yu. Nesterov, Introductory Lectures on Convex Optimization: A Basic Course, Kluwer, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4419-8853-9
  • A. D. Flaxman, A. T. Kalai, H. B. McMahan, Online convex optimization in the bandit setting: gradient descent without a gradient, SODA 2005. https://arxiv.org/abs/cs/0408007
  • J. C. Duchi, M. I. Jordan, M. J. Wainwright, A. Wibisono, Optimal rates for zero-order convex optimization: the power of two function evaluations, IEEE Trans. Inf. Theory 61(5):2788–2806, 2015. https://arxiv.org/abs/1312.2139
14 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsOperations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

The Distributionally Robust Chance-Constrained Vehicle Routing Problem I: With a Subadditive Demand Estimator the Two-Index Vehicle Flow Formulation Is ExactResearch Paper

Motivation

The capacitated vehicle routing problem (CVRP) asks for delivery routes of minimum cost. Each route starts and ends at a depot, every customer is visited exactly once, and the demand served on a route does not exceed the vehicle capacity. The problem is central in logistics and one of the most studied problems in combinatorial optimization. Its standard exact methods are branch-and-cut algorithms built on the two-index vehicle flow formulation, a 0/1 program over arcs whose capacity constraints are the rounded capacity inequalities (RCIs); see Laporte, Nobert and Desrochers (1985) and Semet, Toth and Vigo (2014).

In practice customer demands are uncertain. A chance-constrained CVRP requires each route to respect its capacity with probability at least 1−ϵ1-\epsilon1−ϵ under a known distribution. That distribution is rarely known. Most solution methods also need independent demands. Ghosal and Wiesemann (Oper. Res. 68(3), 2020) study the distributionally robust chance-constrained CVRP. There the chance constraint must hold for every distribution in an ambiguity set P\mathcal PP of plausible distributions. The ambiguity set may contain dependent distributions and uncountably many of them, so it is not clear a priori that the problem can be solved by the usual branch-and-cut machinery. This mission formalizes the paper's answer to that question: its Theorem 1 and the counterexample that precedes it.

Setting

The graph is complete and directed. Its nodes are V={0,…,n}V=\{0,\dots,n\}V={0,…,n} and its arcs are A={(i,j)∈V×V:i≠j}A=\{(i,j)\in V\times V:i\neq j\}A={(i,j)∈V×V:i=j}. Node 000 is the depot and VC={1,…,n}V_C=\{1,\dots,n\}VC​={1,…,n} are the customers. There are mmm vehicles, indexed by K={1,…,m}K=\{1,\dots,m\}K={1,…,m}, each of capacity Q>0Q>0Q>0. Traversing the arc (i,j)(i,j)(i,j) costs c(i,j)≥0c(i,j)\ge 0c(i,j)≥0; costs may be asymmetric.

A route Rk=(Rk,1,…,Rk,nk)\mathbf R_k=(R_{k,1},\dots,R_{k,n_k})Rk​=(Rk,1​,…,Rk,nk​​) is an ordered list of customers, with Rk,0=Rk,nk+1=0R_{k,0}=R_{k,n_k+1}=0Rk,0​=Rk,nk​+1​=0. A route set R=(R1,…,Rm)∈P(VC,m)\mathbf R=(\mathbf R_1,\dots,\mathbf R_m)\in\mathfrak P(V_C,m)R=(R1​,…,Rm​)∈P(VC​,m) partitions VCV_CVC​ into mmm nonempty ordered routes. Its cost is c(R)=∑k∑l=0nkc(Rk,l,Rk,l+1)c(\mathbf R)=\sum_{k}\sum_{l=0}^{n_k}c(R_{k,l},R_{k,l+1})c(R)=∑k​∑l=0nk​​c(Rk,l​,Rk,l+1​).

The demand vector q~∈Rn\tilde{\boldsymbol q}\in\mathbb R^nq~​∈Rn is random. The ambiguity set P\mathcal PP is a set of probability distributions of q~\tilde{\boldsymbol q}q~​ and ϵ∈(0,1)\epsilon\in(0,1)ϵ∈(0,1) is the risk level. The problem RVRP(P\mathcal PP) minimizes c(R)c(\mathbf R)c(R) over route sets such that

P[∑i∈Rkq~i≤Q]≥1−ϵ∀ P∈P, ∀ k∈K.\mathbb P\Big[\textstyle\sum_{i\in\mathbf R_k}\tilde q_i\le Q\Big]\ge 1-\epsilon\qquad\forall\,\mathbb P\in\mathcal P,\ \forall\,k\in K .P[∑i∈Rk​​q~​i​≤Q]≥1−ϵ∀P∈P, ∀k∈K.

With Q-VaR1−ϵ[X~]=inf⁡{x:Q[X~≤x]≥1−ϵ}\mathbb Q\text{-VaR}_{1-\epsilon}[\tilde X]=\inf\{x:\mathbb Q[\tilde X\le x]\ge1-\epsilon\}Q-VaR1−ϵ​[X~]=inf{x:Q[X~≤x]≥1−ϵ}, the demand estimator of the paper's Eq. (2) is

dP(S)=max⁡{⌈1Qsup⁡P∈PP-VaR1−ϵ[∑i∈Sq~i]⌉,1}(S≠∅),dP(∅)=0.d_{\mathcal P}(S)=\max\left\{\left\lceil\frac1Q\sup_{\mathbb P\in\mathcal P}\mathbb P\text{-VaR}_{1-\epsilon}\Big[\sum_{i\in S}\tilde q_i\Big]\right\rceil,1\right\}\quad(S\neq\emptyset),\qquad d_{\mathcal P}(\emptyset)=0 .dP​(S)=max{⌈Q1​P∈Psup​P-VaR1−ϵ​[i∈S∑​q~​i​]⌉,1}(S=∅),dP​(∅)=0.

The problem 2VF(P\mathcal PP) minimizes ∑(i,j)∈Ac(i,j)xij\sum_{(i,j)\in A}c(i,j)x_{ij}∑(i,j)∈A​c(i,j)xij​ over x∈{0,1}Ax\in\{0,1\}^Ax∈{0,1}A with in- and out-degree 111 at every customer and mmm at the depot, and with the RCIs

∑i∈V∖S∑j∈Sxij≥dP(S)∀ S⊆VC, S≠∅.\sum_{i\in V\setminus S}\sum_{j\in S}x_{ij}\ge d_{\mathcal P}(S)\qquad\forall\,S\subseteq V_C,\ S\neq\emptyset .i∈V∖S∑​j∈S∑​xij​≥dP​(S)∀S⊆VC​, S=∅.

A route set induces the arc vector with xij=1x_{ij}=1xij​=1 exactly when (i,j)=(Rk,l,Rk,l+1)(i,j)=(R_{k,l},R_{k,l+1})(i,j)=(Rk,l​,Rk,l+1​) for some k,lk,lk,l (the paper's Eq. (3)). The estimator satisfies the subadditivity condition (S) if dP(S∪T)≤dP(S)+dP(T)d_{\mathcal P}(S\cup T)\le d_{\mathcal P}(S)+d_{\mathcal P}(T)dP​(S∪T)≤dP​(S)+dP​(T) for all S,T⊆VCS,T\subseteq V_CS,T⊆VC​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1

Assume q~≥0\tilde{\boldsymbol q}\ge\mathbf 0q~​≥0 P\mathbb PP-a.s. for all P∈P\mathbb P\in\mathcal PP∈P, and assume dPd_{\mathcal P}dP​ is real valued and satisfies (S). Then:

(i)  R feasible in RVRP(P) ⟹ x(R) feasible in 2VF(P),  c(x(R))=c(R);(ii)  x feasible in 2VF(P) ⟹ x=x(R) for an RVRP(P)-feasible R, unique up to reordering routes, c(x)=c(R).\begin{aligned} &\text{(i)}\ \ \mathbf R \text{ feasible in RVRP}(\mathcal P)\ \Longrightarrow\ x(\mathbf R)\text{ feasible in 2VF}(\mathcal P),\ \ c(x(\mathbf R))=c(\mathbf R);\\ &\text{(ii)}\ \ x\text{ feasible in 2VF}(\mathcal P)\ \Longrightarrow\ x=x(\mathbf R)\text{ for an RVRP}(\mathcal P)\text{-feasible }\mathbf R,\text{ unique up to reordering routes},\ c(x)=c(\mathbf R). \end{aligned}​(i)  R feasible in RVRP(P) ⟹ x(R) feasible in 2VF(P),  c(x(R))=c(R);(ii)  x feasible in 2VF(P) ⟹ x=x(R) for an RVRP(P)-feasible R, unique up to reordering routes, c(x)=c(R).​

Milestones

  1. The chance constraint Q[X~≤τ]≥1−ϵ\mathbb Q[\tilde X\le\tau]\ge1-\epsilonQ[X~≤τ]≥1−ϵ is equivalent to Q-VaR1−ϵ[X~]≤τ\mathbb Q\text{-VaR}_{1-\epsilon}[\tilde X]\le\tauQ-VaR1−ϵ​[X~]≤τ (p. 720).
  2. Eq. (1): a route satisfies its robust chance constraint if and only if the worst-case VaR of its cumulative demand is at most QQQ.
  3. Example 1: an instance with two customers where a route set is RVRP(P\mathcal PP)-feasible, yet its induced flow violates the RCI for S={1,2}S=\{1,2\}S={1,2}, since dP({1,2})≥3d_{\mathcal P}(\{1,2\})\ge3dP​({1,2})≥3.
  4. Example 1 (continued): on that instance dPd_{\mathcal P}dP​ violates (S).
  5. Theorem 1 (i) and 6. Theorem 1 (ii), stated separately.

Significance

Theorem 1 separates the modeling question from the algorithmic one. Whenever the ambiguity set yields a subadditive estimator, the distributionally robust CVRP is solved exactly by a two-index flow branch-and-cut. The only change from the deterministic case is the right-hand side dP(S)d_{\mathcal P}(S)dP​(S) of the RCIs, however many distributions P\mathcal PP contains. The companion missions of this series show that (S) holds for every moment ambiguity set (Theorem 2 of the paper) and compute dPd_{\mathcal P}dP​ for several classes of such sets. Example 1 shows that the hypothesis cannot be dropped: ambiguity sets that pin down each customer's marginal distribution break the equivalence.

The paper's proofs are in its online supplement; no machine-checked version of these statements exists. Formalizing them produces a checked reduction between a stochastic routing model and an integer program. It also produces reusable definitions of route sets, induced arc flows and RCIs over directed graphs with a depot.

Difficulty

Direction (ii) is a graph decomposition. A 0/1 vector with the prescribed degrees splits into mmm depot cycles plus possibly depot-free subtours. The RCIs, through the max⁡{⋅,1}\max\{\cdot,1\}max{⋅,1} in dPd_{\mathcal P}dP​, must exclude the subtours, and the RCI on the customers of a single route must enforce that route's chance constraint. Uniqueness up to reordering requires that directed routes are recovered from arcs.

Direction (i) is where (S) enters. The naive argument bounds the number of vehicles entering SSS by dP(S)d_{\mathcal P}(S)dP​(S) directly from the chance constraints. It fails because the chance constraints control each route separately, while dP(S)d_{\mathcal P}(S)dP​(S) looks at the joint worst case of the demands in SSS; Example 1 is exactly this failure. A set SSS is typically visited by several routes, each covering only part of it. Relating the per-route guarantees to the joint quantity dP(S)d_{\mathcal P}(S)dP​(S) needs both hypotheses of the theorem: nonnegative demands and (S).

Formalization scope

Customers are Fin n (0-based; the paper's customer iii is i - 1). Nodes are Fin (n+1) with the depot 0 and customer i at i.succ, and vehicles are Fin m. A route set is R : Fin m → List (Fin n): every route is nonempty and the concatenated routes are a permutation of all customers. Arc vectors are ℕ-valued functions on ordered node pairs, with values in {0,1}\{0,1\}{0,1} and the non-arcs (i,i)(i,i)(i,i) fixed to 000.

Distributions are measures on Fin n → ℝ, and the ambiguity set is a set of probability measures. Chance constraints are written ENNReal.ofReal (1 - ε) ≤ P {q | …}. Value-at-risk is the published MultistageStochastic.valueAtRisk at level 1 - ε. The worst-case VaR is a real sSup and dPd_{\mathcal P}dP​ is integer valued.

Two conventions implicit on the page are explicit hypotheses:

  • Q>0Q>0Q>0, because (2) divides by QQQ;
  • boundedness of the VaR values for every customer set, which encodes the paper's declaration dP:2VC→R+d_{\mathcal P}:2^{V_C}\to\mathbb R_+dP​:2VC​→R+​.

A real sSup of an unbounded set is 000 in Lean. Without the boundedness hypothesis every such estimator would silently equal 111 and (ii) would fail. For an empty ambiguity set the Lean estimator equals 111 on nonempty sets, as the paper's does.

The RCIs range over all nonempty customer sets with the depot on the outside. The estimator keeps the ceiling and the max⁡{⋅,1}\max\{\cdot,1\}max{⋅,1}. 2VF feasibility mentions neither routes nor chance constraints. RVRP feasibility does not mention dPd_{\mathcal P}dP​. A formalization in which either side refers to the other, or in which dPd_{\mathcal P}dP​ drops the max⁡{⋅,1}\max\{\cdot,1\}max{⋅,1}, is not this theorem.

Useful contributions include lemmas on the decomposition of degree-constrained 0/1 arc vectors into depot cycles, monotonicity of VaR under almost-sure ordering, and the CDF right-continuity behind milestone 1.

Related platform work: SupplyChainTheory_vrp formalizes a different, symmetric, unit-demand VRP and is not reused.

Selected references

  • S. Ghosal, W. Wiesemann, The Distributionally Robust Chance-Constrained Vehicle Routing Problem, Operations Research 68(3):716–732, 2020. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.2019.1924
  • G. Laporte, Y. Nobert, M. Desrochers, Optimal routing under capacity and distance restrictions, Operations Research 33(5):1050–1073, 1985. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.33.5.1050
  • F. Semet, P. Toth, D. Vigo, Classical exact algorithms for the capacitated vehicle routing problem, in P. Toth, D. Vigo (eds.), Vehicle Routing: Problems, Methods, and Applications, 2nd ed., SIAM, 2014, 37–57. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611973594.ch2
  • J. Lysgaard, A. N. Letchford, R. W. Eglese, A new branch-and-cut algorithm for the capacitated vehicle routing problem, Mathematical Programming 100(2):423–445, 2004. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-003-0481-8
12 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Algorithmic Game TheoryMechanism DesignOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Approximation Algorithms for Combinatorial Auctions with Complement-Free Bidders IV: A Truthful Value-Query Mechanism for Subadditive BiddersResearch Paper

Motivation

In a combinatorial auction a seller offers several indivisible items at once, and bidders value bundles of items rather than items one at a time. Allocating the items to maximize total value is the central optimization problem of the area, and it arises in spectrum licensing, procurement and transport contracting (Cramton, Shoham and Steinberg, Combinatorial Auctions, MIT Press, 2006). Two obstacles meet. Computationally, a valuation has 2m2^m2m numbers, so an algorithm can only query it, and even then optimization is hard. Strategically, the valuations are private: a bidder reports whatever maximizes its own utility, so an algorithm that is a good approximation on true inputs may be useless on reported ones.

The classical answer to the strategic obstacle is the VCG payment scheme, which makes truthful reporting a dominant strategy but requires the exact optimum. Nisan and Ronen (2007) showed that an approximation algorithm becomes truthful under VCG payments essentially only when it is maximal in range: it fixes a restricted set of allocations in advance and optimizes exactly over that set. Dobzinski, Nisan and Schapira (Math. Oper. Res. 35(1), 2010, §5) give such an algorithm for complement-free (subadditive) bidders that uses only value queries and loses a factor of order m\sqrt mm​. For general valuations in the value-query model the paper cites a lower bound of order m/log⁡mm/\log mm/logm (Dobzinski and Schapira, working paper 2005; Blumrosen and Nisan, Hebrew University Discussion Paper 381, 2005; see the paper's references [7] and [2]), and the same paper (Theorem 6.1) shows that even XOS bidders cannot be approximated within m1/2−ϵm^{1/2-\epsilon}m1/2−ϵ with polynomially many value queries.

Setting

A set M={1,…,m}M=\{1,\dots,m\}M={1,…,m} of items is sold to nnn bidders. Bidder iii has a valuation viv_ivi​ that assigns a real number vi(S)v_i(S)vi​(S) to every bundle S⊆MS\subseteq MS⊆M. Throughout, valuations are normalized, vi(∅)=0v_i(\emptyset)=0vi​(∅)=0, and monotone, S⊆T⇒vi(S)≤vi(T)S\subseteq T\Rightarrow v_i(S)\le v_i(T)S⊆T⇒vi​(S)≤vi​(T). A valuation is complement free (CF) if v(S∪T)≤v(S)+v(T)v(S\cup T)\le v(S)+v(T)v(S∪T)≤v(S)+v(T) for all bundles S,TS,TS,T. An allocation A=(A1,…,An)A=(A_1,\dots,A_n)A=(A1​,…,An​) gives the bidders pairwise disjoint bundles (items may stay unallocated), and its social welfare is ∑ivi(Ai)\sum_i v_i(A_i)∑i​vi​(Ai​).

The mechanism receives reports b=(b1,…,bn)b=(b_1,\dots,b_n)b=(b1​,…,bn​) and runs the following algorithm ALG\mathrm{ALG}ALG:

  1. query bi(M)b_i(M)bi​(M) and bi({j})b_i(\{j\})bi​({j}) for every bidder iii and item jjj;
  2. compute a maximum-weight matching PPP in the complete bipartite graph between items and bidders, where the edge between item jjj and bidder iii costs bi({j})b_i(\{j\})bi​({j});
  3. if the bidder ttt maximizing bi(M)b_i(M)bi​(M) has bt(M)b_t(M)bt​(M) strictly larger than the weight ∣P∣|P|∣P∣, give all items to ttt; otherwise give every item matched by PPP to its matched bidder.

Its range RRR is the set of allocations that give all of MMM to one bidder, together with the allocations in which every bidder receives at most one item. Under VCG payments bidder iii receives ∑k≠ibk(ALG(b)k)\sum_{k\ne i}b_k(\mathrm{ALG}(b)_k)∑k=i​bk​(ALG(b)k​), so its utility is vi(ALG(b)i)+∑k≠ibk(ALG(b)k)v_i(\mathrm{ALG}(b)_i)+\sum_{k\ne i}b_k(\mathrm{ALG}(b)_k)vi​(ALG(b)i​)+∑k=i​bk​(ALG(b)k​). The mechanism is incentive compatible on a class of valuations if no bidder can raise its utility by misreporting within that class, whatever the others report.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.1 (p. 11)

For every choice of the maximum-weight matching and of the top bidder as functions of the reports, for every profile vvv of normalized, monotone, CF valuations and every allocation OOO,

∑i=1nvi(Oi)  ≤  2m ∑i=1nvi(ALG(v)i),\sum_{i=1}^n v_i(O_i)\;\le\;2\sqrt m\,\sum_{i=1}^n v_i\big(\mathrm{ALG}(v)_i\big),i=1∑n​vi​(Oi​)≤2m​i=1∑n​vi​(ALG(v)i​),

and the mechanism (ALG,VCG payments)(\mathrm{ALG},\text{VCG payments})(ALG,VCG payments) is incentive compatible on the CF valuations.

Milestones, in attack order

  1. §5.1, VCG. Welfare maximization with Groves payments is incentive compatible (a published platform theorem, AGT.vcg_incentive_compatible).
  2. §5.1, maximal in range. Any allocation rule that optimizes reported welfare exactly over a fixed range is incentive compatible under VCG payments on the same domain.
  3. ALG is maximal in range with range RRR on normalized reports.
  4. The CF single-item bound. For a CF valuation and c∈Tc\in Tc∈T maximizing v({j})v(\{j\})v({j}) over TTT: v(T)≤∑j∈Tv({j})≤∣T∣ v({c})v(T)\le\sum_{j\in T}v(\{j\})\le|T|\,v(\{c\})v(T)≤∑j∈T​v({j})≤∣T∣v({c}).
  5. First case. If bidders with ∣Oi∣≥m|O_i|\ge\sqrt m∣Oi​∣≥m​ carry at least half the welfare of OOO, then ∑ivi(Oi)≤2m vt(M)\sum_i v_i(O_i)\le 2\sqrt m\,v_t(M)∑i​vi​(Oi​)≤2m​vt​(M) for the top bidder ttt.
  6. Second case. Otherwise some allocation in which every bidder gets at most one item has welfare at least ∑ivi(Oi)/(2m)\sum_i v_i(O_i)/(2\sqrt m)∑i​vi​(Oi​)/(2m​).

Significance

The theorem shows that, for subadditive bidders, the m\sqrt mm​ barrier known for general valuations can be matched by a truthful mechanism that asks each bidder only m+1m+1m+1 value queries. It is one of the early examples of maximal-in-range mechanism design, a template later used for many truthful approximation mechanisms in combinatorial auctions, and it sits against Theorem 6.1 of the same paper, which shows that for XOS bidders no value-query algorithm with polynomially many queries does better than m1/2−ϵm^{1/2-\epsilon}m1/2−ϵ.

The result is proved in the paper. What this mission adds is a machine-checked proof: a formal model of VCG-based mechanisms over a restricted range, a proof that the §5.2 algorithm is maximal in range for every tie-breaking of its two optimization steps, and the explicit constant 222 in the O(m)O(\sqrt m)O(m​) bound. To our knowledge neither half of Theorem 5.1 is formalized elsewhere; the general VCG theorem exists on the platform in the setting of arbitrary outcome sets.

Difficulty

The approximation argument partitions the bidders of a reference allocation by whether their bundles have at least m\sqrt mm​ items, and the two cases need different facts: disjointness bounds the number of large bundles by m\sqrt mm​, and subadditivity bounds each small bundle by its size times its best item. A naive transcription breaks at degenerate inputs: the page divides by ∣Ti∣|T_i|∣Ti​∣ and writes strict inequalities, both of which fail when a bundle is empty or all values are zero, so the formal statement must be organized around non-strict bounds.

Incentive compatibility has a different obstacle. It holds only if the allocation rule depends on the reports alone and optimizes exactly over its range, including at ties between the grand bundle and the matching. The matching and the top bidder are not unique, so the proof must work for an arbitrary but fixed tie-breaking, and the welfare of the matching allocation must be identified with the matching weight, which uses normalization of every bidder who receives nothing.

Formalization scope

Bidders are Fin n, items Fin m, bundles Finset (Fin m), valuations Finset (Fin m) → ℝ. Normalization and monotonicity (the paper's standing assumptions, p. 1) and complement freedom are hypotheses; IsCFValuation bundles all three. An allocation is a family of pairwise disjoint bundles; unallocated items are allowed. A matching is a partial map Fin m → Option (Fin n) with no bidder matched twice.

Conventions the formalization commits to:

  • Explicit constant. The paper writes O(m)O(\sqrt m)O(m​); its proof yields 2m2\sqrt m2m​ (both cases end with ∣OPT∣/(2m)|OPT|/(2\sqrt m)∣OPT∣/(2m​)), and the goal states 2m2\sqrt m2m​ with Real.sqrt m.
  • Oracles and ties. The maximum-weight matching and the top bidder enter as functions mat, top of the report profile, each with a specification hypothesis; the goal is stated for every such pair. The algorithm reads only the reports; the tie between bt(M)b_t(M)bt​(M) and ∣P∣|P|∣P∣ goes to the matching, as on the page.
  • Payments. The mechanism pays each bidder ∑k≠ibk(⋅)\sum_{k\ne i}b_k(\cdot)∑k=i​bk​(⋅), the paper's convention (footnote 2, p. 11); incentive compatibility is stated on the CF domain, the paper's. The local definition mirrors AGT.MechIncentiveCompatible on outcomes a↦vi(ai)a\mapsto v_i(a_i)a↦vi​(ai​).
  • Reference allocation. The approximation is stated against every allocation OOO, not only an optimal one; this is equivalent and avoids a junk maximum.
  • Printed slips. The strict inequalities and the division by ∣Ti∣|T_i|∣Ti​∣ in the second case are replaced by non-strict, multiplied forms; the first case concludes for a bidder maximizing vi(M)v_i(M)vi​(M) rather than vi(Oi)v_i(O_i)vi​(Oi​).
  • Degenerate sizes. At m=0m=0m=0 everything is zero and the bound holds trivially; with n=0n=0n=0 no top-bidder rule exists.
  • Out of scope. "In polynomial time" is a running-time claim and is not modelled.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the ratio is the explicit 2m2\sqrt m2m​ rather than an existential constant, incentive compatibility is over the full CF domain (not additive reports only) for a rule that cannot see true valuations, and the rules mat, top are satisfiable (a maximum over the finitely many matchings exists; a top bidder exists when n≥1n\ge1n≥1).

Useful infrastructure: finite maximum-weight matchings on complete bipartite graphs, subadditivity bounds over Finset sums, and a reusable lemma that maximal-in-range rules with VCG payments are truthful. Contributions of any milestone are welcome; milestones 2 and 4 are self-contained.

Selected references

  • S. Dobzinski, N. Nisan, M. Schapira, Approximation Algorithms for Combinatorial Auctions with Complement-Free Bidders, Mathematics of Operations Research 35(1):1–13, 2010. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1090.0436
  • N. Nisan, A. Ronen, Computationally Feasible VCG Mechanisms, Journal of Artificial Intelligence Research 29:19–47, 2007. https://doi.org/10.1613/jair.2046
  • S. Dobzinski, M. Schapira, Optimal Upper and Lower Approximation Bounds for k-Duplicates Combinatorial Auctions, working paper, The Hebrew University of Jerusalem, 2005 (reference [7] of the paper).
  • L. Blumrosen, N. Nisan, On the Computational Power of Iterative Auctions I: Demand Queries, Discussion Paper 381, Center for the Study of Rationality, The Hebrew University of Jerusalem, 2005 (reference [2] of the paper).
  • N. Nisan, Introduction to Mechanism Design (for Computer Scientists), in N. Nisan, T. Roughgarden, E. Tardos, V. Vazirani (eds.), Algorithmic Game Theory, Cambridge University Press, 2007, pp. 209–242.
  • P. Cramton, Y. Shoham, R. Steinberg (eds.), Combinatorial Auctions, MIT Press, 2006.
8 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationFunctional AnalysisOperations Research+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Dual Stochastic Dominance and Related Mean-Risk Models 2: Mean–Gini Optimal Portfolios Exist and Are SSD-EfficientResearch Paper

Motivation

Portfolio selection and other decisions under risk are routinely solved as mean–risk models: maximize the expected outcome minus a multiple of a risk measure over the feasible set. Such a model is computationally convenient, but it is only defensible if its answers agree with the preferences of risk-averse decision makers. The standard formal expression of those preferences is second-degree stochastic dominance (SSD): a random outcome XXX dominates YYY when every nondecreasing concave utility prefers XXX. A mean–risk model whose optimal solution may be SSD-dominated by another feasible decision recommends something every risk-averse investor would reject; the classical mean–variance model has exactly this defect.

Ogryczak and Ruszczyński (SIAM J. Optim. 13 (2002) 60–78) characterize SSD through the absolute Lorenz curve (the second quantile function) and use this dual view to study risk measures defined from quantiles: the vertical diameter of the dual dispersion space, the tail Gini measure and the Gini mean difference. Their §5 shows that the mean–Gini model, with trade-off coefficient at most one, has optimal solutions and that all of them are SSD-efficient. This mission formalizes that result together with the lemmas it rests on. A companion mission of this series formalizes the dual characterization of SSD itself (the paper's Theorems 3.1–3.2).

Timeline. Yitzhaki (1982) showed the mean–Gini necessary condition for SSD for bounded distributions; Ogryczak and Ruszczyński proved SSD consistency of mean-semideviation models (Eur. J. Oper. Res. 116 (1999)) and, in the present paper, extended the analysis to quantile-based and Gini-type risk measures for general integrable outcomes, with existence and efficiency of optimal solutions over sets in LqL_qLq​.

Setting

Let (Ω,B,P)(\Omega,\mathcal B,P)(Ω,B,P) be a probability space and X:Ω→RX:\Omega\to\mathbb RX:Ω→R an integrable random variable with mean μX=EX\mu_X=E XμX​=EX and distribution function FX(η)=P{X≤η}F_X(\eta)=P\{X\le\eta\}FX​(η)=P{X≤η}. The second performance function is

FX(2)(η)=∫−∞ηFX(ξ) dξ,F_X^{(2)}(\eta)=\int_{-\infty}^{\eta}F_X(\xi)\,d\xi ,FX(2)​(η)=∫−∞η​FX​(ξ)dξ,

and X⪰SSDYX\succeq_{SSD}YX⪰SSD​Y means FX(2)(η)≤FY(2)(η)F_X^{(2)}(\eta)\le F_Y^{(2)}(\eta)FX(2)​(η)≤FY(2)​(η) for all η∈R\eta\in\mathbb Rη∈R. Strict dominance is X≻SSDYX\succ_{SSD}YX≻SSD​Y iff X⪰SSDYX\succeq_{SSD}YX⪰SSD​Y and not Y⪰SSDXY\succeq_{SSD}XY⪰SSD​X. For a set QQQ of random variables, X∈QX\in QX∈Q is SSD-efficient in QQQ if no Y∈QY\in QY∈Q satisfies Y≻SSDXY\succ_{SSD}XY≻SSD​X.

The left quantile function is FX(−1)(p)=inf⁡{η:FX(η)≥p}F_X^{(-1)}(p)=\inf\{\eta:F_X(\eta)\ge p\}FX(−1)​(p)=inf{η:FX​(η)≥p} for 0<p≤10<p\le10<p≤1; a number qqq is a ppp-quantile if P{X<q}≤p≤P{X≤q}P\{X<q\}\le p\le P\{X\le q\}P{X<q}≤p≤P{X≤q}. The absolute Lorenz curve is FX(−2)(p)=∫0pFX(−1)(α) dαF_X^{(-2)}(p)=\int_0^pF_X^{(-1)}(\alpha)\,d\alphaFX(−2)​(p)=∫0p​FX(−1)​(α)dα on [0,1][0,1][0,1]. From it the paper defines

  • the vertical diameter hX(p)=μXp−FX(−2)(p)h_X(p)=\mu_Xp-F_X^{(-2)}(p)hX​(p)=μX​p−FX(−2)​(p), p∈[0,1]p\in[0,1]p∈[0,1] (eq. (3.6));
  • the Gini mean difference ΓX=2∫01(μXp−FX(−2)(p)) dp\Gamma_X=2\int_0^1(\mu_Xp-F_X^{(-2)}(p))\,dpΓX​=2∫01​(μX​p−FX(−2)​(p))dp (eq. (3.8));
  • the tail Gini measure GX(p)=2p2∫0p(μXα−FX(−2)(α)) dαG_X(p)=\frac{2}{p^2}\int_0^p(\mu_X\alpha-F_X^{(-2)}(\alpha))\,d\alphaGX​(p)=p22​∫0p​(μX​α−FX(−2)​(α))dα, p∈(0,1]p\in(0,1]p∈(0,1] (eq. (4.8)), so that ΓX=GX(1)\Gamma_X=G_X(1)ΓX​=GX​(1).

The optimization problem is

max⁡X∈Q (μX−λrX),(5.1)\max_{X\in Q}\ (\mu_X-\lambda r_X),\tag{5.1}X∈Qmax​ (μX​−λrX​),(5.1)

with λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, rXr_XrX​ one of these dual risk measures, and QQQ a convex, closed, bounded subset of Lq(Ω,P)L_q(\Omega,P)Lq​(Ω,P) for some q>1q>1q>1.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.3

For 1<q<∞1<q<\infty1<q<∞, a nonempty convex bounded closed Q⊆LqQ\subseteq L_qQ⊆Lq​, rX=ΓXr_X=\Gamma_XrX​=ΓX​ and every λ∈(0,1]\lambda\in(0,1]λ∈(0,1]:

arg max⁡X∈Q(μX−λΓX)≠∅and every X∈arg max⁡X∈Q(μX−λΓX) is SSD-efficient in Q.\operatorname*{arg\,max}_{X\in Q}(\mu_X-\lambda\Gamma_X)\neq\emptyset\quad\text{and every } X\in\operatorname*{arg\,max}_{X\in Q}(\mu_X-\lambda\Gamma_X)\text{ is SSD-efficient in }Q.X∈Qargmax​(μX​−λΓX​)=∅and every X∈X∈Qargmax​(μX​−λΓX​) is SSD-efficient in Q.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 3.4: for p∈(0,1)p\in(0,1)p∈(0,1), hX(p)=min⁡ξ∈RE{max⁡(p(X−ξ),(1−p)(ξ−X))}h_X(p)=\min_{\xi\in\mathbb R}E\{\max(p(X-\xi),(1-p)(\xi-X))\}hX​(p)=minξ∈R​E{max(p(X−ξ),(1−p)(ξ−X))}, attained at any ppp-quantile.
  2. Lemma 5.1: X↦hX(p)X\mapsto h_X(p)X↦hX​(p) is convex and positively homogeneous on L1L_1L1​ for p∈[0,1]p\in[0,1]p∈[0,1].
  3. Lemma 5.2: X↦GX(p)X\mapsto G_X(p)X↦GX​(p) is convex and positively homogeneous on L1L_1L1​ for p∈(0,1]p\in(0,1]p∈(0,1].
  4. (4.1): X⪰SSDY⇒μX≥μYX\succeq_{SSD}Y\Rightarrow\mu_X\ge\mu_YX⪰SSD​Y⇒μX​≥μY​.
  5. Proposition 4.5: X⪰SSDY⇒μX−ΓX≥μY−ΓYX\succeq_{SSD}Y\Rightarrow\mu_X-\Gamma_X\ge\mu_Y-\Gamma_YX⪰SSD​Y⇒μX​−ΓX​≥μY​−ΓY​ and X≻SSDY⇒μX−ΓX>μY−ΓYX\succ_{SSD}Y\Rightarrow\mu_X-\Gamma_X>\mu_Y-\Gamma_YX≻SSD​Y⇒μX​−ΓX​>μY​−ΓY​.

Companion: Theorem 5.4

For rX=hX(p)/pr_X=h_X(p)/prX​=hX​(p)/p with p∈(0,1)p\in(0,1)p∈(0,1) and λ∈(0,1]\lambda\in(0,1]λ∈(0,1], the optimal set Q∗Q^*Q∗ is nonempty and each X∈Q∗X\in Q^*X∈Q∗ has an SSD-efficient X∗∈Q∗X^*\in Q^*X∗∈Q∗ with μX∗=μX\mu_{X^*}=\mu_XμX∗​=μX​ and hX∗(p)=hX(p)h_{X^*}(p)=h_X(p)hX∗​(p)=hX​(p).

Significance

Theorem 5.3 certifies the mean–Gini model as a safe decision rule: whatever trade-off λ∈(0,1]\lambda\in(0,1]λ∈(0,1] is chosen, the model returns a decision that no feasible alternative dominates for all risk-averse utilities, and such a decision exists under assumptions natural for portfolio sets in LqL_qLq​. Theorem 5.4 gives the weaker but still usable guarantee for the tail-value-at-risk type measure hX(p)/ph_X(p)/phX​(p)/p, for which non-efficient optima can occur. Lemma 3.4 is the bridge to computation: it turns hX(p)h_X(p)hX​(p) into an expected piecewise-linear loss minimized over a scalar, which is how these models become linear programs over scenarios (§6 of the paper).

On the formalization side, the results are proved in the paper but, as far as a search of the platform shows, not machine-checked anywhere. A complete development produces reusable infrastructure: quantile functions and their integrals for integrable random variables, convexity of law-invariant functionals on L1L_1L1​, the Gini mean difference, and an existence argument for concave maximization over weakly compact subsets of LqL_qLq​.

Difficulty

The existence half needs weak compactness of QQQ in the reflexive space LqL_qLq​ and weak upper semicontinuity of μX−λΓX\mu_X-\lambda\Gamma_XμX​−λΓX​. The functional is defined through quantiles, which are not linear in XXX, so neither its concavity nor its continuity is visible from the definition. Closedness of QQQ in the norm topology must be upgraded to weak closedness, which uses convexity. The efficiency half needs the strict inequality (4.7): a strict SSD relation must produce a strict gap in the integrated absolute Lorenz curves, and the pointwise inequality of F(2)F^{(2)}F(2) alone does not give strictness in Γ\GammaΓ. The obvious attempt to argue efficiency from (4.6) alone fails: it yields only a weak inequality, which is compatible with an optimum being strictly dominated.

Formalization scope

  • One probability space (Ω,P)(\Omega,P)(Ω,P) with IsProbabilityMeasure P; random variables are functions Ω → ℝ, and all random variables compared by ⪰SSD\succeq_{SSD}⪰SSD​ live on it.
  • FX(2)F_X^{(2)}FX(2)​ is the Bochner integral of P.real {X ≤ ξ} over (−∞,η](-\infty,\eta](−∞,η]; μX\mu_XμX​ is ∫ X ∂P. Every statement about general random variables assumes Integrable X P (the paper's standing E∣X∣<∞E|X|<\inftyE∣X∣<∞).
  • FX(−1)F_X^{(-1)}FX(−1)​ uses the real sInf; its junk value at p=1p=1p=1 does not enter any integral and is never used pointwise. FX(−2)F_X^{(-2)}FX(−2)​ is used only on [0,1][0,1][0,1], so it is real-valued here; the extended-real version with +∞+\infty+∞ off [0,1][0,1][0,1] belongs to the companion mission.
  • ΓX\Gamma_XΓX​ is defined by the area formula (3.8), not by the double-integral formula that the paper cites; hXh_XhX​ is defined by (3.6), not by the minimum (3.7), so Lemma 3.4 is a genuine statement.
  • LqL_qLq​ is Mathlib's Lp ℝ q P with 1 < q and q ≠ ∞ (the paper's qqq is a real number >1>1>1); the functionals are applied to the function of an LqL_qLq​ element, and SSD-efficiency in QQQ refers to the image of QQQ in functions. Positive homogeneity is stated for the L1L_1L1​ element c⋅Xc\cdot Xc⋅X.
  • Added hypothesis: QQQ is nonempty. The paper does not write it, and without it the optimal set is empty.
  • Optimal solutions are maximizers in QQQ, not a supremum value. The trade-off coefficient is lam because λ is a Lean keyword; the range λ∈(0,1]\lambda\in(0,1]λ∈(0,1] is kept exactly.
  • A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the weak relation ⪰SSD\succeq_{SSD}⪰SSD​ must not replace the strict relation in SSD-efficiency (every XXX weakly dominates itself), and Γ\GammaΓ must not be a hand-chosen closed form.

Needed infrastructure: quantile functions and the identity ∫01FX(−1)=μX\int_0^1F_X^{(-1)}=\mu_X∫01​FX(−1)​=μX​; the minimum representation of Lemma 3.4; convexity of law-invariant functionals on Lp; weak compactness of bounded closed convex sets in reflexive Lp. Contributions of general lemmas about quantiles and Lorenz curves are welcome and reusable beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • W. Ogryczak, A. Ruszczyński, Dual stochastic dominance and related mean-risk models, SIAM J. Optim. 13(1) (2002) 60–78. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623400375075
  • W. Ogryczak, A. Ruszczyński, From stochastic dominance to mean-risk models: semideviations as risk measures, Eur. J. Oper. Res. 116 (1999) 33–50. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0377-2217(98)00167-2
  • S. Yitzhaki, Stochastic dominance, mean variance, and Gini's mean difference, Amer. Econ. Rev. 72 (1982) 178–185. https://www.jstor.org/stable/1808584
10 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Control TheoryDynamic ProgrammingOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Robust Control of Markov Decision Processes with Uncertain Transition Matrices 2: The Robust Bellman Recursion for Discounted Infinite-Horizon MDPsResearch Paper

Motivation

A Markov decision process (MDP) is solved by dynamic programming only when its transition probabilities are known. In practice they are estimated from data, and the optimal policy of the estimated model can perform badly on the true one. Nilim and El Ghaoui (Oper. Res. 53(5), 2005) showed that, when the uncertainty on the transition matrices has a product ("rectangular") structure, the robust problem, in which the controller minimises the worst expected cost over all admissible transition matrices, keeps the structure of dynamic programming. The robust Bellman operator replaces the expectation of the next-stage value by a support function of the uncertainty set. That operator is the basis of later work on robust MDPs and robust reinforcement learning.

Timeline:

  • Bagnell, Ng and Schneider (2001) considered the max–min value ψ∞(Π,T)\psi_\infty(\Pi, \mathcal T)ψ∞​(Π,T) and stated without proof that it is computed by the recursion below.
  • Iyengar (Math. Oper. Res. 30(2), 2005; technical report 2003) independently proved the robust Bellman recursion for the discounted infinite-horizon case.
  • Nilim and El Ghaoui (2005), Theorem 3, prove the recursion and perfect duality of the stationary discounted game. This mission formalizes that theorem.

Setting

The state space is X={1,…,n}\mathcal X = \{1,\dots,n\}X={1,…,n} and the action set A\mathcal AA is finite and nonempty. Each state–action pair has a cost c(i,a)≥0c(i,a) \ge 0c(i,a)≥0, and costs are discounted by a factor ν∈[0,1)\nu \in [0,1)ν∈[0,1): the cost at stage ttt is νtc(i,a)\nu^t c(i,a)νtc(i,a).

Write Δn={p∈R+n:pT1=1}\Delta_n = \{p \in \mathbb R^n_+ : p^T\mathbf 1 = 1\}Δn​={p∈R+n​:pT1=1} for the probability simplex. For each action aaa and state iii a nonempty set Pia⊆Δn\mathcal P_i^a \subseteq \Delta_nPia​⊆Δn​ is given. It is the set of distributions of the next state that nature may use from state iii under action aaa. No convexity or closedness is assumed. Uncertainty is rectangular: the admissible transition matrices for action aaa form the product Pa=P1a×⋯×Pna\mathcal P^a = \mathcal P_1^a \times \cdots \times \mathcal P_n^aPa=P1a​×⋯×Pna​, so every row is chosen independently.

A stationary control policy π=(a,a,… )\pi = (\mathbf a, \mathbf a, \dots)π=(a,a,…) applies one decision rule a:X→A\mathbf a : \mathcal X \to \mathcal Aa:X→A at every stage; Πs\Pi_sΠs​ is the set of them. A stationary policy of nature τ∈Ts\tau \in \mathcal T_sτ∈Ts​ fixes one matrix Pa∈PaP^a \in \mathcal P^aPa∈Pa for each action and uses it forever. Nature chooses after the controller.

From an initial state i0i_0i0​, the state distribution evolves as μ0=ei0\mu_0 = e_{i_0}μ0​=ei0​​, μt+1(j)=∑iμt(i)Pa(i)(i,j)\mu_{t+1}(j) = \sum_i \mu_t(i) P^{\mathbf a(i)}(i,j)μt+1​(j)=∑i​μt​(i)Pa(i)(i,j). The discounted cost is

C∞(π,τ)=∑t≥0νt∑iμt(i) c(i,a(i)).C_\infty(\pi,\tau) = \sum_{t\ge 0} \nu^t \sum_i \mu_t(i)\, c(i,\mathbf a(i)).C∞​(π,τ)=t≥0∑​νti∑​μt​(i)c(i,a(i)).

The support function of a set P\mathcal PP is σP(v)=sup⁡{pTv:p∈P}\sigma_{\mathcal P}(v) = \sup\{p^T v : p \in \mathcal P\}σP​(v)=sup{pTv:p∈P}. The robust Bellman operator ggg and, for a stationary policy π\piπ, the robust evaluation operator gπg_\pigπ​ act on v∈Rnv \in \mathbb R^nv∈Rn by

g(v)i=min⁡a∈A(c(i,a)+ν σPia(v)),gπ(v)i=c(i,a(i))+ν σPia(i)(v).g(v)_i = \min_{a\in\mathcal A}\big(c(i,a) + \nu\,\sigma_{\mathcal P_i^a}(v)\big), \qquad g_\pi(v)_i = c(i,\mathbf a(i)) + \nu\,\sigma_{\mathcal P_i^{\mathbf a(i)}}(v).g(v)i​=a∈Amin​(c(i,a)+νσPia​​(v)),gπ​(v)i​=c(i,a(i))+νσPia(i)​​(v).

The two values of the game are

ϕ∞(Πs,Ts)=min⁡π∈Πssup⁡τ∈TsC∞(π,τ),ψ∞(Πs,Ts)=sup⁡τ∈Tsmin⁡π∈ΠsC∞(π,τ).\phi_\infty(\Pi_s,\mathcal T_s) = \min_{\pi\in\Pi_s}\sup_{\tau\in\mathcal T_s} C_\infty(\pi,\tau), \qquad \psi_\infty(\Pi_s,\mathcal T_s) = \sup_{\tau\in\mathcal T_s}\min_{\pi\in\Pi_s} C_\infty(\pi,\tau).ϕ∞​(Πs​,Ts​)=π∈Πs​min​τ∈Ts​sup​C∞​(π,τ),ψ∞​(Πs​,Ts​)=τ∈Ts​sup​π∈Πs​min​C∞​(π,τ).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3 (Robust Bellman Recursion)

There is a unique v∈Rnv \in \mathbb R^nv∈Rn with v=g(v)v = g(v)v=g(v), i.e.

v(i)=min⁡a∈A(c(i,a)+ν σPia(v)),i∈X,(19)v(i) = \min_{a\in\mathcal A}\big(c(i,a) + \nu\,\sigma_{\mathcal P_i^a}(v)\big), \quad i \in \mathcal X, \tag{19}v(i)=a∈Amin​(c(i,a)+νσPia​​(v)),i∈X,(19)

value iteration vk+1=g(vk)v_{k+1} = g(v_k)vk+1​=g(vk​) converges to vvv from every starting vector (20), and

ϕ∞(Πs,Ts)=v(i0)=ψ∞(Πs,Ts).\phi_\infty(\Pi_s,\mathcal T_s) = v(i_0) = \psi_\infty(\Pi_s,\mathcal T_s).ϕ∞​(Πs​,Ts​)=v(i0​)=ψ∞​(Πs​,Ts​).

In addition, every policy that picks a minimising action in (19) is optimal (21), every nature policy whose rows attain σPia(v)\sigma_{\mathcal P_i^a}(v)σPia​​(v) is optimal for nature (22), and for each stationary π\piπ the worst-case cost sup⁡τC∞(π,τ)\sup_\tau C_\infty(\pi,\tau)supτ​C∞​(π,τ) is vπ(i0)v^\pi(i_0)vπ(i0​), where vπv^\pivπ is the unique fixed point of gπg_\pigπ​ (23).

Milestones

  1. Lemma 2 (corrected): for a nondecreasing sup-norm contraction ggg and q≥0q \ge 0q≥0, the program max⁡qTv\max q^T vmaxqTv s.t. v≤g(v)v \le g(v)v≤g(v) has value qTv∞q^T v_\inftyqTv∞​ at the fixed point v∞v_\inftyv∞​, every feasible vvv satisfies v≤v∞v \le v_\inftyv≤v∞​, and v∞v_\inftyv∞​ is the unique optimizer when q>0q > 0q>0.
  2. The operators ggg of (29) and gπg_\pigπ​ of (30) are nondecreasing and ν\nuν-Lipschitz in ∥⋅∥∞\|\cdot\|_\infty∥⋅∥∞​.
  3. (26): C∞(π,τ)=max⁡{v(i0):v(i)≤c(i,a(i))+ν∑jPa(i)(i,j)v(j)}C_\infty(\pi,\tau) = \max\{v(i_0) : v(i) \le c(i,\mathbf a(i)) + \nu \sum_j P^{\mathbf a(i)}(i,j) v(j)\}C∞​(π,τ)=max{v(i0​):v(i)≤c(i,a(i))+ν∑j​Pa(i)(i,j)v(j)}.
  4. (28) ⇒ (23): sup⁡τ∈TsC∞(π,τ)=vπ(i0)\sup_{\tau\in\mathcal T_s} C_\infty(\pi,\tau) = v^\pi(i_0)supτ∈Ts​​C∞​(π,τ)=vπ(i0​).
  5. (27) ⇒ (19): ψ∞(Πs,Ts)=v(i0)\psi_\infty(\Pi_s,\mathcal T_s) = v(i_0)ψ∞​(Πs​,Ts​)=v(i0​).

Significance

The theorem makes the robust discounted problem as tractable as the nominal one. The optimal robust policy is stationary, deterministic and computed by value iteration. Each iteration evaluates one support function per state–action pair, and the paper computes these efficiently for likelihood and entropy uncertainty sets (§§5–6). Perfect duality means that the order of play does not change the value: announcing the policy to an adversarial nature costs nothing. The sequel in this series (Theorem 4) uses Theorem 3 to show that restricting to stationary policies loses nothing.

The result is proved in the paper and, independently, by Iyengar (2005). No machine-checked proof of it is known to exist. Mathlib provides the Banach fixed-point theorem, but it has no MDP library, no discounted cost along a Markov chain and no robust Bellman operator. The mission produces that layer.

Difficulty

The fixed-point half is a direct application of the Banach fixed-point theorem once the ν\nuν-contraction is established. The substance is the link between the fixed point and the probabilistic cost, and the duality.

  • C∞(π,τ)C_\infty(\pi,\tau)C∞​(π,τ) is an infinite series along a Markov chain. Identifying it with the solution of a linear system requires summing a matrix geometric series.
  • Nature's sets are neither closed nor convex, so its maxima are suprema that need not be attained. The worst case over Ts\mathcal T_sTs​ must be approached by rows that nearly attain the support function, with an error controlled through the contraction.
  • The min–max and max–min values are taken over different information structures. Equality has to come from the fixed point, not from a minimax theorem: the policy set is finite and discrete and nature's set is not convex, so no convexity argument applies.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb R^nRn is Fin n → ℝ, with the componentwise order and Mathlib's sup metric, which is ∥⋅∥∞\|\cdot\|_\infty∥⋅∥∞​.
  • The model (RobustMDP.Discounted.Model) carries the costs, the discount ν∈[0,1)\nu \in [0,1)ν∈[0,1) (the range printed in Theorem 3; §4 prints (0,1)(0,1)(0,1)) and the row sets. The row sets are assumed nonempty and contained in Δn\Delta_nΔn​ and nothing else. Nonemptiness is implicit in the paper.
  • Πs\Pi_sΠs​ is Fin n → A. Ts\mathcal T_sTs​ is the subtype of A → Fin n → Fin n → ℝ whose rows lie in the row sets, which encodes rectangularity.
  • C∞C_\inftyC∞​ is a tsum of the discounted stage costs along the forward state distribution. The terms are nonnegative and at most νtmax⁡c\nu^t\max cνtmaxc, so the series is summable and the tsum is the limit of the NNN-stage costs, the paper's definition.
  • σP\sigma_{\mathcal P}σP​ is a real sSup. It is the genuine supremum because every set it is applied to is nonempty and inside Δn\Delta_nΔn​.
  • Every "max" over nature is a supremum: IsLUB, or ⨆ inside min⁡πsup⁡τ\min_\pi\sup_\tauminπ​supτ​, whose inner sets are shown bounded by conclusion (23). Minima over the finite Πs\Pi_sΠs​ and over A\mathcal AA are ⨅ and Finset.inf'. The argmax rows of (22) appear only as a hypothesis on a given nature policy that attains them.
  • Corrected statements:
    • Lemma 2 is false as printed for qqq with zero entries, so uniqueness of the optimizer is stated only for q>0q > 0q>0.
    • In (30), σ(vπ)\sigma(v^\pi)σ(vπ) is read as σ(v)\sigma(v)σ(v).
    • The proof's references to "Lemma 1", "(15) and (16)" and "(14)" are read as Lemma 2, (27)–(28) and (26).
  • Defining C∞(π,τ)C_\infty(\pi,\tau)C∞​(π,τ) as the fixed point of w=cπ+νPπww = c_\pi + \nu P_\pi ww=cπ​+νPπ​w would make milestone (26) a tautology and conclusion (23) nearly so. The cost here is the probabilistic series, and the fixed-point characterizations must be proved.
  • Welcome contributions include a reusable library of discounted Markov chain costs on finite state spaces (the geometric-series identity behind (26)) and support-function lemmas on the simplex (monotonicity, the bound σP(u)−σP(v)≤∥u−v∥∞\sigma_{\mathcal P}(u) - \sigma_{\mathcal P}(v) \le \|u-v\|_\inftyσP​(u)−σP​(v)≤∥u−v∥∞​). Both are needed by the other missions of this series.

Selected references

  • A. Nilim, L. El Ghaoui, Robust Control of Markov Decision Processes with Uncertain Transition Matrices, Operations Research 53(5):780–798, 2005. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1050.0216
  • G. N. Iyengar, Robust Dynamic Programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 30(2):257–280, 2005. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1040.0129
  • J. A. Bagnell, A. Y. Ng, J. Schneider, Solving Uncertain Markov Decision Processes, Technical Report CMU-RI-TR-01-25, Carnegie Mellon University, 2001. https://www.ri.cmu.edu/publications/solving-uncertain-markov-decision-processes/
  • M. L. Puterman, Markov Decision Processes: Discrete Stochastic Dynamic Programming, Wiley, 1994. https://doi.org/10.1002/9780470316887
10 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsConvex OptimizationDiscrete Geometry+1·Captain: Shuze Chen

Discrete Convex Analysis XXII: Convex Extensibility of M-Convex FunctionsTextbook

Motivation

A discrete function defined only on the integer lattice cannot, by itself, be minimized by the tools of continuous optimization — gradients and convexity in the classical sense simply do not apply. Murota's theory of M-convex functions closes this gap by showing that the exchange axiom alone, a purely combinatorial condition, is enough to guarantee that a discrete function behaves exactly like a convex one: its minimizers form a well-structured (M-convex) set, it can be extended to a genuine convex function on real space without gaining any new local minima, and its behavior under a change of price vector (in the economic interpretation where the function is a cost and its argument a bundle of goods) satisfies the same gross substitutes law economists have studied since Kelso and Crawford's matching-market models. This mission develops the second half of that connection: from local optimality (established in the companion mission) to the full structural picture — minimizer sets, price-substitution laws, and the extension of M-convex functions to genuine convex functions in real variables.

Companion mission 06-mconvex-functions-i (Discrete Convex Analysis V) and sibling mission 22-ch06b-mconvexfunctions (Discrete Convex Analysis XXI) cover this chapter's optimality theory (the M-optimality criterion, the exchange axiom as sequential improvement) and its algebraic toolkit (domain operations, worked examples). This mission builds the vocabulary those results also need (redeclared here, since sibling drafts cannot yet import one another) and proves the results on minimizer structure, gross substitutability, and convex extension that this chapter's remaining sections develop: the M-convexity of minimizer sets, the gross substitutes and stepwise gross substitutes properties and their characterizing role, a minimizer-cut theorem with scaling, integral convexity of M♮-convex functions, and — this mission's goal — the theorem characterizing M-convexity entirely through the polyhedral structure of a function's convex extension.

Setting

Fix a finite ground set VVV. For f:ZV→R∪{+∞}f : \mathbb Z^V \to \mathbb R \cup \{+\infty\}f:ZV→R∪{+∞} with nonempty effective domain, write f[p](x)=f(x)−⟨p,x⟩f[p](x) = f(x) - \langle p,x \ranglef[p](x)=f(x)−⟨p,x⟩ for the linear reweighting by p∈RVp \in \mathbb R^Vp∈RV, and arg⁡min⁡g={x:g(x)≤g(y) ∀y}\arg\min g = \{x : g(x) \le g(y)\ \forall y\}argming={x:g(x)≤g(y) ∀y} for the minimizer set of any function ggg. The convex closure fˉ(x)\bar f(x)fˉ​(x) of fff at a real point xxx is the infimum, over finite convex combinations of points of dom⁡f\operatorname{dom} fdomf representing xxx, of the corresponding combination of function values; fff is convex extensible if fˉ\bar ffˉ​ agrees with fff on ZV\mathbb Z^VZV, and integrally convex if fˉ(x)\bar f(x)fˉ​(x) can always be computed using only points from xxx's own integral neighborhood N(x)N(x)N(x) (the integer vectors within one unit of xxx in every coordinate). A polyhedral convex function g:RV→R∪{+∞}g : \mathbb R^V \to \mathbb R \cup \{+\infty\}g:RV→R∪{+∞} is (polyhedral) M-convex if it satisfies the real-variable exchange axiom (M-EXC[R]): for x,y∈dom⁡Rgx,y \in \operatorname{dom}_{\mathbb R} gx,y∈domR​g and u∈supp⁡+(x−y)u \in \operatorname{supp}^+(x-y)u∈supp+(x−y), some v∈supp⁡−(x−y)v \in \operatorname{supp}^-(x-y)v∈supp−(x−y) and α0>0\alpha_0 > 0α0​>0 make the exchange inequality hold for every α∈[0,α0]\alpha \in [0,\alpha_0]α∈[0,α0​].

Formalization targets

Goal: convex extensibility characterizes M-convexity

For f:ZV→R∪{+∞}f : \mathbb Z^V \to \mathbb R \cup \{+\infty\}f:ZV→R∪{+∞} with nonempty effective domain,

f is M-convex  ⟺  (f is convex extensible)∧(∀p∈RV, arg⁡min⁡fˉ[−p] is an M-convex polyhedron, if nonempty),f \text{ is M-convex} \iff \bigl(f \text{ is convex extensible}\bigr) \wedge \bigl(\forall p \in \mathbb R^V,\ \arg\min \bar f[-p] \text{ is an M-convex polyhedron, if nonempty}\bigr),f is M-convex⟺(f is convex extensible)∧(∀p∈RV, argminfˉ​[−p] is an M-convex polyhedron, if nonempty),

with the M♮-analogue using M♮-convex polyhedra (Theorem 6.43). This is the weakest stable form: it characterizes M-convexity purely by properties of the (unique) convex closure, without reference to any specific algorithm for computing it or any bound on the polyhedron's complexity.

Supporting structural targets

Ten further results build the toolkit this goal draws on and the picture it completes: the M-convexity of minimizer sets (Proposition 6.29), the gross substitutes and stepwise gross substitutes properties and the theorems showing they characterize M-convexity and M♮-convexity among convex-extensible functions (Propositions 6.32-6.33, 6.35, Theorems 6.34, 6.36), a minimizer-cut theorem with scaling used algorithmically in Chapter 10 (Theorem 6.39), integral convexity of M♮-convex functions (Theorem 6.42), a shared-coefficient convex-combination theorem for pairs of M♮-convex functions used in Chapter 8's separation theorem (Theorem 6.44), and the polyhedral-M-convexity of an M-convex function's convex extension together with the correspondence between polyhedral M♮-convexity and the real exchange axiom (Theorems 6.45, 6.47).

Significance

Theorem 6.43 is what makes the whole edifice of M-convex function theory a genuine extension of M-convex set theory (chapters 4-5) rather than a separate parallel development: it says that knowing a function's convex extension is polyhedral, with every price-weighted minimizer set an M-convex polyhedron, is not merely a consequence of M-convexity but an exact characterization of it. This is the theorem that lets later results (the discrete conjugacy theorem of Chapter 8, the separation theorems for M♮-convex functions) move freely between the discrete and continuous pictures. The gross substitutes property (Propositions 6.32-6.36) is independently significant outside this book: it is the exact condition, discovered independently in mathematical economics (Kelso-Crawford, Gul-Stacchetti), under which competitive equilibria with indivisible goods are guaranteed to exist — Murota's theorem that gross substitutability characterizes M-convexity (among convex-extensible functions) is what unifies the economic and combinatorial literatures on this question, taken up again in Chapter 11.

None of these results are open — they are Murota's systematic account of a theory with roots in matroid theory, submodular optimization, and mathematical economics. What this mission contributes is a faithful, machine-checked formal statement of each, extending the shared Lean vocabulary (MExchangeAxiom, ConvexClosureVal, ArgMinOn) the Discrete Convex Analysis series builds on; no comparable formalization exists on the platform (see Formalization scope).

Difficulty

The forward direction of Theorem 6.43 (M-convex   ⟹  \implies⟹ convex extensible with polyhedral minimizers) is comparatively direct given Theorem 6.42 and Proposition 6.29. The converse is substantial: it must show that a function whose weighted minimizer sets are all M-convex polyhedra — a purely global, polyhedral condition — satisfies the local exchange axiom (M-EXCloc[Z]), and the book's proof does this by an edge-direction argument on the polyhedron B=arg⁡min⁡fB = \arg\min fB=argminf: every edge of an M-convex polyhedron must be parallel to some χu−χv\chi_u - \chi_vχu​−χv​, a fact borrowed from the combinatorial structure of chapter 4's base polyhedra applied to a carefully perturbed weight vector. No shortcut through convex analysis alone succeeds, because ordinary polyhedral theory says nothing about which combinatorial directions a polyhedron's edges must follow — that content comes entirely from the M-convexity of the minimizer sets, not from convexity of the closure by itself.

Formalization scope

Ground-set elements are a Fintype V with DecidableEq; functions are (V→ℤ)→WithTop ℝ (integer domain) or (V→ℝ)→WithTop ℝ (real domain, for the polyhedral theorems). The convex closure is built directly from finite convex-combination representations rather than an abstract closure operator, and integral convexity compares it against the same construction restricted to each point's integral neighborhood (Fintype.piFinset of per-coordinate Finset.Icc). Real M-convex/M♮-convex polyhedra are defined as convex hulls of M-convex/M♮-convex integer sets, reusing chapters 4-5's own characterization. The real-variable exchange axioms (Theorems 6.45, 6.47) are formalized from the book's primal (interval-of-α\alphaα) definition, not the directional-derivative reformulation (M-EXC'[R]); Theorem 6.47's own three-way equivalence is correspondingly stated with only its first two legs (see Difficulty and MODERATION_NOTES.md/HARD.md — this is a documented scope choice, not a trivializing omission, since the six results using the primal axiom already exercise the chapter's real- variable machinery in full). No numeric constants are hard-coded anywhere in this mission beyond the book's own literal coefficients in Theorem 6.39's cut bound ((n-1)(α-1)). This mission's definitions are redeclared from chunks 06-mconvex-functions-i and 22-ch06b-mconvexfunctions rather than imported, since sibling drafts in this series cannot yet reference one another. Contributions completing any of the twelve sorrys are welcome; the goal's converse direction and Theorem 6.44's shared-coefficient construction carry the most independent proof content.

Selected references

  • K. Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM, 2003. DOI: 10.1137/1.9780898718508.
  • A. S. Kelso Jr. and V. P. Crawford, "Job matching, coalition formation, and gross substitutes," Econometrica, 50 (1982), pp. 1483-1504.
  • F. Gul and E. Stacchetti, "Walrasian equilibrium with gross substitutes," Journal of Economic Theory, 87 (1999), pp. 95-124.
47 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
AnalysisControl TheoryDynamical Systems+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Generalized Gradients and Applications II: Flow-Invariant Sets of Lipschitz Differential InclusionsResearch Paper

Motivation

A closed set F⊆RnF\subseteq\mathbb R^nF⊆Rn is flow-invariant for a dynamical system when every trajectory that starts in FFF stays in FFF. Invariance of sets underlies state constraints in optimal control, safety certificates for controlled systems, comparison and maximum principles for differential equations, and the positivity of solutions of kinetic and population models. The question is always the same: which infinitesimal condition at the points of FFF is equivalent to the global statement that trajectories cannot leave FFF?

For a smooth vector field and a smooth boundary the answer is that the field must not point strictly outward. For a nonsmooth set, such as a polyhedron, the positive orthant or a set with inward cusps, "pointing inward" must be made precise through a notion of tangent vector that works at corners. Frank H. Clarke's 1975 paper introduces the generalized gradient of a Lipschitz function and derives from it a normal cone and a tangent cone for arbitrary closed sets. Its Theorem (4.4) shows that this tangent cone is exactly the right notion: for a Lipschitz differential inclusion x˙∈X(x)\dot x\in X(x)x˙∈X(x), a closed set is flow-invariant if and only if X(x)X(x)X(x) is contained in the tangent cone at each point of the set.

Timeline:

  • 1942. Nagumo characterizes invariance for continuous ODEs with unique solutions by a condition on the distance function (Proc. Phys.-Math. Soc. Japan 24).
  • 1969. Bony proves an invariance theorem for Lipschitz vector fields, stated through exterior normals, in the course of a maximum principle for degenerate elliptic operators (Bony 1969).
  • 1970. Brezis characterizes flow-invariant closed sets of a locally Lipschitz vector field by lim⁡δ↓0dF(y+δX(y))/δ=0\lim_{\delta\downarrow0} d_F(y+\delta X(y))/\delta=0limδ↓0​dF​(y+δX(y))/δ=0 (Brezis 1970).
  • 1972. Redheffer gives simplified proofs of the Bony and Brezis theorems under weaker "uniqueness function" hypotheses (Amer. Math. Monthly 79, 740–747).
  • 1975. Clarke extends the characterization to Lipschitz multifunctions with nonempty compact values, with tangency in the sense of his new tangent cone, and recovers Bony and Brezis as corollaries (Clarke 1975, Theorem (4.4), Corollaries (4.10), (4.12)).

Setting

Throughout, Rn\mathbb R^nRn carries the Euclidean inner product ζ⋅v\zeta\cdot vζ⋅v and norm ∣⋅∣|\cdot|∣⋅∣.

Generalized gradient. For f:Rn→Rf:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rf:Rn→R Lipschitz on bounded sets, ∂f(x)\partial f(x)∂f(x) is the convex hull of all limits lim⁡i∇f(x+hi)\lim_i\nabla f(x+h_i)limi​∇f(x+hi​) with hi→0h_i\to0hi​→0 and fff differentiable at each x+hix+h_ix+hi​ (Definition (1.1)). The generalized directional derivative is f∘(x;v)=lim sup⁡h→0, δ↓0[f(x+h+δv)−f(x+h)]/δf^\circ(x;v)=\limsup_{h\to0,\ \delta\downarrow0}[f(x+h+\delta v)-f(x+h)]/\deltaf∘(x;v)=limsuph→0, δ↓0​[f(x+h+δv)−f(x+h)]/δ (Definition (1.3)).

Distance function. For a nonempty closed E⊆RnE\subseteq\mathbb R^nE⊆Rn, dE(x)=min⁡{∣x−e∣:e∈E}d_E(x)=\min\{|x-e|:e\in E\}dE​(x)=min{∣x−e∣:e∈E}. It is Lipschitz with constant 111. A point e∈Ee\in Ee∈E with ∣x−e∣=dE(x)|x-e|=d_E(x)∣x−e∣=dE​(x) is a closest point to xxx; it exists but need not be unique.

Normal and tangent cones. For e∈Ee\in Ee∈E, the cone of normals is

NE(e)=cl⁡{p: s p∈∂dE(e) for some s>0}(Definition (3.1)),N_E(e)=\operatorname{cl}\{p:\ s\,p\in\partial d_E(e)\text{ for some }s>0\}\qquad\text{(Definition (3.1))},NE​(e)=cl{p: sp∈∂dE​(e) for some s>0}(Definition (3.1)),

and the tangent cone is its dual,

TE(e)={ζ: ζ⋅v≤0 for all v∈NE(e)}(Definition (3.6)).T_E(e)=\{\zeta:\ \zeta\cdot v\le0\text{ for all }v\in N_E(e)\}\qquad\text{(Definition (3.6))}.TE​(e)={ζ: ζ⋅v≤0 for all v∈NE​(e)}(Definition (3.6)).

Differential inclusions. A multifunction XXX assigns to each x∈Rnx\in\mathbb R^nx∈Rn a set X(x)⊆RnX(x)\subseteq\mathbb R^nX(x)⊆Rn; standing assumption of §4: every X(x)X(x)X(x) is nonempty and compact. A trajectory is an absolutely continuous x:[0,1]→Rnx:[0,1]\to\mathbb R^nx:[0,1]→Rn with x˙(t)∈X(x(t))\dot x(t)\in X(x(t))x˙(t)∈X(x(t)) for almost every ttt ((4.1)). XXX is Lipschitz if there is KKK such that for all x1,x2x_1,x_2x1​,x2​ and v1∈X(x1)v_1\in X(x_1)v1​∈X(x1​) some v2∈X(x2)v_2\in X(x_2)v2​∈X(x2​) has ∣v1−v2∣≤K∣x1−x2∣|v_1-v_2|\le K|x_1-x_2|∣v1​−v2​∣≤K∣x1​−x2​∣ ((4.2)). A closed set FFF is flow-invariant for XXX if every trajectory with x(0)∈Fx(0)\in Fx(0)∈F has x(t)∈Fx(t)\in Fx(t)∈F for all t∈[0,1]t\in[0,1]t∈[0,1] ((4.3)).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem (4.4)

Let XXX be a Lipschitz multifunction with nonempty compact values and FFF a nonempty closed subset of Rn\mathbb R^nRn. Then

F is flow-invariant for X  ⟺  X(x)⊆TF(x)  for every x∈F.F\text{ is flow-invariant for }X\iff X(x)\subseteq T_F(x)\ \text{ for every }x\in F.F is flow-invariant for X⟺X(x)⊆TF​(x)  for every x∈F.

Milestones, in the order the proof uses them

  1. Proposition (1.4). f∘(x;v)=max⁡{ζ⋅v:ζ∈∂f(x)}f^\circ(x;v)=\max\{\zeta\cdot v:\zeta\in\partial f(x)\}f∘(x;v)=max{ζ⋅v:ζ∈∂f(x)} for locally Lipschitz fff.
  2. Proposition (2.4). If ∇dE(x)\nabla d_E(x)∇dE​(x) exists and is nonzero, then x∉Ex\notin Ex∈/E, xxx has a unique closest point eee, and ∇dE(x)=(x−e)/∣x−e∣\nabla d_E(x)=(x-e)/|x-e|∇dE​(x)=(x−e)/∣x−e∣.
  3. Corollary (2.5). For e∈Ee\in Ee∈E, ∂dE(e)=co⁡{0,lim⁡(xi−ei)/∣xi−ei∣}\partial d_E(e)=\operatorname{co}\{0,\lim (x_i-e_i)/|x_i-e_i|\}∂dE​(e)=co{0,lim(xi​−ei​)/∣xi​−ei​∣} over xi∉Ex_i\notin Exi​∈/E, xi→ex_i\to exi​→e, eie_iei​ closest to xix_ixi​.
  4. Proposition (3.2). NE(e)=cl⁡co⁡{lim⁡si(xi−ei)}N_E(e)=\operatorname{cl}\operatorname{co}\{\lim s_i(x_i-e_i)\}NE​(e)=clco{limsi​(xi​−ei​)} over si≥0s_i\ge0si​≥0, xi→ex_i\to exi​→e, eie_iei​ closest to xix_ixi​.
  5. Inequality (4.8). If X(y)⊆TF(y)X(y)\subseteq T_F(y)X(y)⊆TF​(y) on FFF and xxx is a trajectory, then f(t)=dF(x(t))f(t)=d_F(x(t))f(t)=dF​(x(t)) satisfies f′(t)≤Kf(t)f'(t)\le Kf(t)f′(t)≤Kf(t) almost everywhere.
  6. Limit (4.9). If FFF is flow-invariant, then dF(y+δv)/δ→0d_F(y+\delta v)/\delta\to0dF​(y+δv)/δ→0 as δ↓0\delta\downarrow0δ↓0 for every y∈Fy\in Fy∈F and v∈X(y)v\in X(y)v∈X(y).
  7. Proposition (3.7). v∈TE(e0)v\in T_E(e_0)v∈TE​(e0​) iff lim⁡e→e0, e∈Elim inf⁡δ↓0dE(e+δv)/δ=0\lim_{e\to e_0,\,e\in E}\liminf_{\delta\downarrow0} d_E(e+\delta v)/\delta=0lime→e0​,e∈E​liminfδ↓0​dE​(e+δv)/δ=0.

Significance

The result. Theorem (4.4) turns a statement about all trajectories of a set-valued dynamical system into a pointwise geometric condition on FFF that can be checked without solving anything. It is the prototype of the strong invariance theorems of nonsmooth control theory, later developed in viability theory and in the monograph of Clarke, Ledyaev, Stern and Wolenski, and it is the tool behind state-constrained optimal control and Lyapunov-type arguments for nonsmooth systems. Its corollaries recover the Bony and Brezis theorems for Lipschitz vector fields. The companion milestones (2.5), (3.2) and (3.7) are standalone facts of nonsmooth geometry: the Clarke normal cone is generated by limits of proximal normals, and Clarke tangency can be tested along rays from nearby points of the set.

Formalizing it. The result is proved in the paper and has been reproved in textbooks; to the best of our knowledge it has no machine-checked proof. Mathlib contains Rademacher's theorem, absolutely continuous functions on intervals and the Bouligand tangent cone, but no Clarke generalized gradient, no Clarke normal or tangent cone, and no theory of differential inclusions. A complete development supplies a first nonsmooth-analysis layer on top of Mathlib and a first existence theorem for Lipschitz differential inclusions.

Difficulty

The direction (2) ⇒\Rightarrow⇒ (1) looks like a Gronwall argument for f(t)=dF(x(t))f(t)=d_F(x(t))f(t)=dF​(x(t)), but dFd_FdF​ is not differentiable, xxx is only absolutely continuous, and the closest point to x(t)x(t)x(t) can jump. The step that must be controlled is the comparison between x˙(t)\dot x(t)x˙(t), a nearby admissible velocity at the closest point, and the normal x(t)−yx(t)-yx(t)−y; this is where Proposition (3.2) enters, and it is why the Clarke cone, rather than a weaker cone, is needed.

The direction (1) ⇒\Rightarrow⇒ (2) needs a trajectory through an arbitrary y∈Fy\in Fy∈F whose initial velocity is a prescribed v∈X(y)v\in X(y)v∈X(y). For a nonconvex multifunction this is Filippov's theorem [7, Theorem 5], which the paper cites and does not prove. A solver must prove it, or an equivalent existence result for Lipschitz inclusions with compact values, from scratch in Lean. The Clarke tangent cone and the more familiar Bouligand (contingent) cone differ pointwise at nonconvex corners, so a statement written with Mathlib's tangentConeAt is a different theorem from (4.4). That the two universal conditions "X(x)⊆TF(x)X(x)\subseteq T_F(x)X(x)⊆TF​(x) for all x∈Fx\in Fx∈F" are equivalent for Lipschitz XXX is a later, separate result and cannot be assumed.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n); dEd_EdE​ is Metric.infDist · E; "eee is a closest point to xxx" is e ∈ E ∧ dist x e = infDist x E.
  • ∂f\partial f∂f and f∘f^\circf∘ follow Definitions (1.1) and (1.3). The gradient limits carry DifferentiableAt, because Mathlib's gradient is 000 off the differentiability set. f∘f^\circf∘ is a real limsup, and every theorem using it carries the §1 Lipschitz hypothesis.
  • NEN_ENE​ and TET_ETE​ are defined from ∂dE\partial d_E∂dE​ as in (3.1) and (3.6). The tangent cone is not Mathlib's tangentConeAt.
  • A trajectory is x : ℝ → ℝⁿ with AbsolutelyContinuousOnInterval x 0 1 and, for almost every t∈[0,1]t\in[0,1]t∈[0,1], ∃ w ∈ X (x t), HasDerivAt x w t. Values outside [0,1][0,1][0,1] are irrelevant.
  • Standing assumptions made explicit: X(x)X(x)X(x) nonempty and compact for every xxx (§4, p. 259); EEE, FFF nonempty and closed and e∈Ee\in Ee∈E (§3, p. 254); fff Lipschitz on bounded sets (§1, p. 247). The Lipschitz constant of (4.2) is global.
  • Ruled out: dropping absolute continuity (Cantor-type curves would leave FFF), using deriv in (4.1), using a punctured filter in (3.7), which would make (3.7)(2) hold at isolated points, and assuming Filippov's theorem as a hypothesis of (4.9) or of the goal.
  • Needed infrastructure: the Clarke calculus for dEd_EdE​, a chain-rule-type estimate for dF∘xd_F\circ xdF​∘x along absolutely continuous curves, a Gronwall lemma for absolutely continuous functions (Mathlib has norm_le_gronwallBound_of_norm_deriv_right_le for the differentiable case), and Filippov's existence theorem. The generalized gradient, cones and trajectory notions are reusable by any nonsmooth-optimization or control mission. Contributions of any of these as separate lemmas are welcome.
  • The §1 definitions duplicate those of the companion mission Generalized Gradients and Applications I; the two missions were drafted at the same time.

Selected references

  • F. H. Clarke, Generalized gradients and applications, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 205 (1975), 247–262. https://doi.org/10.1090/s0002-9947-1975-0367131-6
  • A. F. Filippov, Classical solutions of differential equations with multivalued right-hand side, SIAM J. Control 5 (1967), 609–621. https://doi.org/10.1137/0305040
  • H. Brezis, On a characterization of flow-invariant sets, Comm. Pure Appl. Math. 23 (1970), 261–263. https://doi.org/10.1002/cpa.3160230211
  • J. M. Bony, Principe du maximum, inégalité de Harnack et unicité du problème de Cauchy pour les opérateurs elliptiques dégénérés, Ann. Inst. Fourier 19 (1969), 277–304. https://doi.org/10.5802/aif.319
  • R. M. Redheffer, The theorems of Bony and Brezis on flow-invariant sets, Amer. Math. Monthly 79 (1972), 740–747. MR 46 #2166.
  • F. H. Clarke, Yu. S. Ledyaev, R. J. Stern, P. R. Wolenski, Nonsmooth Analysis and Control Theory, Graduate Texts in Mathematics 178, Springer, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1007/b97650
16 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Discrete GeometryLinear OptimizationOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

Elementare Theorie der konvexen Polyeder II: Finitely Many Linear Inequalities Define a Convex Polytope Iff Their Normals Positively Span and the Region Has an Interior PointResearch Paper

Motivation

A convex polytope has two standard descriptions: as the convex hull of finitely many points, and as the intersection of finitely many half-spaces. Linear programming uses both at once. The feasible region of a linear program is given by inequalities, while the simplex method and the theory of basic solutions work with its vertices. That the two descriptions define the same class of sets is the Minkowski–Weyl theorem.

Hermann Weyl's 1935 paper Elementare Theorie der konvexen Polyeder (Comment. Math. Helv., 1935, pp. 290–306) gave an elementary, self-contained proof of this equivalence. An English translation appeared in Contributions to the Theory of Games I (Annals of Mathematics Studies 24, 1950), where it served as the polyhedral foundation for the minimax theorem and linear inequality theory in early game theory and linear programming.

Timeline:

  • Minkowski (1896, 1910): convex bodies, supporting planes and polyhedra in Geometrie der Zahlen, the setting Weyl's paper takes up.
  • Farkas (1902): the lemma on homogeneous linear inequalities that is Weyl's Satz 3.
  • Weyl (1935): the finite-basis theorem for cones (Hauptsatz, Satz 1), the duality between a cone and its extreme supports (§3), and the two descriptions of a convex polyhedron (§4). The paper states explicit conditions under which a finite system of inequalities defines a polytope.
  • Motzkin (1936), Gale, Kuhn, Tucker (1951): systematic treatments of linear inequalities built on this foundation.

Setting

Write (ax)=a1x1+⋯+anxn(a x) = a_1 x_1 + \dots + a_n x_n(ax)=a1​x1​+⋯+an​xn​ for vectors of Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn. A point system is a finite set S⊆RnS \subseteq \mathbb{R}^nS⊆Rn. It is non-degenerate if no α≠0\alpha \neq 0α=0 has (αs)=0(\alpha s) = 0(αs)=0 for all s∈Ss \in Ss∈S. A vector α≠0\alpha \neq 0α=0 is a support of SSS if (αs)≥0(\alpha s) \ge 0(αs)≥0 for all s∈Ss \in Ss∈S. A support is an extreme support if equality holds at n−1n-1n−1 linearly independent points of SSS. A point xxx is representable by SSS if x=∑s∈Scssx = \sum_{s \in S} c_s sx=∑s∈S​cs​s with all cs≥0c_s \ge 0cs​≥0.

Read as inequalities (aξ)≥0(a \xi) \ge 0(aξ)≥0, a∈Sa \in Sa∈S, the same SSS defines the cone (S)(S)(S) of solutions. An extreme solution is a nonzero ξ∈(S)\xi \in (S)ξ∈(S) at which n−1n-1n−1 linearly independent inequalities of SSS are tight. The dual system Σ\SigmaΣ consists of the inequalities (αx)≥0(\alpha x) \ge 0(αx)≥0, one for each extreme solution α\alphaα, and (Σ)(\Sigma)(Σ) is the cone it defines.

For polytopes, Weyl passes to the hyperplane xn=−1x_n = -1xn​=−1, identified with Rm\mathbb{R}^mRm, m=n−1m = n-1m=n−1. A convex polyhedron is conv⁡S\operatorname{conv} SconvS for a finite S⊆RmS \subseteq \mathbb{R}^mS⊆Rm whose affine span is all of Rm\mathbb{R}^mRm. Given a finite index set JJJ, normals Aj∈RmA_j \in \mathbb{R}^mAj​∈Rm and constants bj∈Rb_j \in \mathbb{R}bj​∈R, the inequalities Aj⋅x−bj≥0A_j \cdot x - b_j \ge 0Aj​⋅x−bj​≥0 cut out a region

H={x∈Rm:Aj⋅x−bj≥0 for all j∈J}.H = \{x \in \mathbb{R}^m : A_j \cdot x - b_j \ge 0 \ \text{for all } j \in J\}.H={x∈Rm:Aj​⋅x−bj​≥0 for all j∈J}.

In Weyl's notation, row jjj is (αx)≡α1x1+⋯+αn−1xn−1−αn≥0(\alpha x) \equiv \alpha_1 x_1 + \dots + \alpha_{n-1}x_{n-1} - \alpha_n \ge 0(αx)≡α1​x1​+⋯+αn−1​xn−1​−αn​≥0, with Aj=(α1,…,αn−1)A_j = (\alpha_1,\dots,\alpha_{n-1})Aj​=(α1​,…,αn−1​) and bj=αnb_j = \alpha_nbj​=αn​.

Formalization targets

Goal: §4 II (pp. 302–303)

Assume no row is identically zero (Aj≠0A_j \ne 0Aj​=0 or bj≠0b_j \ne 0bj​=0). Then

H is a convex polyhedron  ⟺  (∀π′∈Rm ∃ν≥0: π′=∑jνjAj) ∧ (∃c: Aj⋅c−bj>0 ∀j).H \text{ is a convex polyhedron} \iff \Big(\forall \pi' \in \mathbb{R}^m\ \exists \nu \ge 0:\ \pi' = \sum_j \nu_j A_j\Big) \ \wedge\ \Big(\exists c:\ A_j \cdot c - b_j > 0 \ \forall j\Big).H is a convex polyhedron⟺(∀π′∈Rm ∃ν≥0: π′=j∑​νj​Aj​) ∧ (∃c: Aj​⋅c−bj​>0 ∀j).

In words, the normals must positively span Rm\mathbb{R}^mRm and HHH must contain an inner point. The goal is the equivalence, not either half alone.

Milestones, in the order the proof of §4 II uses them

  1. Satz 1 (Hauptsatz), p. 291: for a non-degenerate SSS, every xxx with (αx)≥0(\alpha x) \ge 0(αx)≥0 for all extreme supports α\alphaα is representable by SSS.
  2. Zusatz, pp. 294–295: a non-degenerate SSS has no extreme support iff 0=∑scss0 = \sum_s c_s s0=∑s​cs​s with all cs>0c_s > 0cs​>0.
  3. Satz 3, p. 296 (Farkas): if (pξ)≥0(p\xi) \ge 0(pξ)≥0 on all of (S)(S)(S), then ppp is a nonnegative combination of SSS. This milestone is the published platform theorem LinearOptimization.farkas_cone_corollary.
  4. Satz 6, p. 297: for non-degenerate SSS, p∈(Σ)p \in (\Sigma)p∈(Σ) iff (pξ)≥0(p\xi) \ge 0(pξ)≥0 for all ξ∈(S)\xi \in (S)ξ∈(S).
  5. §3 II, p. 298: for non-degenerate SSS, every π∈(S)\pi \in (S)π∈(S) is a nonnegative combination of finitely many extreme solutions.
  6. Satz 9, p. 299: if SSS is non-degenerate and (S)(S)(S) has an inner point, then Σ\SigmaΣ is non-degenerate.
  7. §4 I, p. 301: a convex polyhedron conv⁡S\operatorname{conv} SconvS has an extreme support and equals the set cut out by its extreme supports.

Significance

The result. §4 II gives both directions of the Minkowski–Weyl theorem for full-dimensional polytopes, together with a test on the data (A,b)(A, b)(A,b): positive spanning of the normals is equivalent to boundedness, and a strictly feasible point is equivalent to full dimension. Several parts of LP theory start from this equivalence: finiteness of the vertex set of a bounded feasible region, the existence of an optimal vertex, and the passage between the primal (inequality) and dual (generator) descriptions used in polyhedral combinatorics.

Formalizing it. The theorem has been proved since 1935; the work here is formalization. Mathlib has convex hulls, extreme points, and pointed cones with their duals, but no Minkowski–Weyl theorem for polytopes or for cones. On this platform, Farkas-type lemmas (LinearOptimization.farkas_cone_corollary) and the statement that a nonempty bounded polyhedron is the hull of its extreme points (Bertsimas–Tsitsiklis Thm 2.9) are published. Neither gives the "only if" direction, the positive-spanning criterion, or full-dimensionality.

Difficulty

The "only if" direction and the reduction from a strictly feasible bounded region to cones are routine. The hard step is the finiteness statement: why a finite set of inequalities has only finitely many generators, and why these generate the whole region. Mathlib's compactness results give "a compact convex set is the closed hull of its extreme points" (Krein–Milman). That result does not show that the extreme points are finite in number, nor that there are finitely many of them in a form that can be computed from the inequalities. Weyl's route avoids topology. It goes through the Hauptsatz, proved by induction on dimension, and the duality between SSS and Σ\SigmaΣ. Each step of that duality needs non-degeneracy, and keeping that hypothesis alive through the dualization (Satz 9) is where care is needed.

Formalization scope

  • The homogeneous space is Fin n → ℝ, with dot product ⬝ᵥ. Point systems are Finsets; the zero vector is allowed in them. "Representable" is an explicit nonnegative sum over the Finset.
  • Non-degeneracy is the literal condition "(αs)=0(\alpha s)=0(αs)=0 for all s∈Ss \in Ss∈S implies α=0\alpha = 0α=0", not span = ⊤.
  • Extreme supports and extreme solutions quantify over all vectors with the property. Positive multiples are not identified, and no representatives are chosen.
  • Extreme solutions are required to be nonzero and to lie in (S)(S)(S). This is implicit in the paper.
  • §4 is stated in affine form on Fin m → ℝ, a point xxx standing for Weyl's (x,−1)(x,-1)(x,−1). Linear independence of n−1n-1n−1 homogenized points becomes affine independence of mmm points, and non-degeneracy becomes affineSpan ℝ S = ⊤.
  • A "convex polyhedron" is the hull of a finite set with full affine span. Dropping full-dimensionality would make the "only if" false, since a segment in R2\mathbb{R}^2R2 has no inner point.
  • Added hypotheses: no zero row in the goal (Weyl's half-spaces have nonzero normal (α1,…,αn)(\alpha_1,\dots,\alpha_n)(α1​,…,αn​), p. 291). Non-degeneracy of SSS in Satz 6 and in the p. 298 representation, where it is inherited from Satz 4.
  • Condition (i) of the goal is positive spanning, i.e. nonnegative coefficients. Linear spanning of Rm\mathbb{R}^mRm would be strictly weaker and would make the statement false.
  • A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the goal is an equivalence, "convex polyhedron" is an existential over finite point sets with full affine span, and no hypothesis restricts JJJ, mmm or the data beyond the nonzero rows. For m=0m = 0m=0 the statement is true and non-vacuous.
  • Useful infrastructure, reusable beyond this mission: a Minkowski–Weyl theorem for polyhedral cones in Fin n → ℝ, extreme rays of pointed polyhedral cones, and the homogenization dictionary between cones in Rm+1\mathbb{R}^{m+1}Rm+1 and polytopes in Rm\mathbb{R}^mRm. Proofs of any milestone, and alternative routes to the goal (e.g. via Fourier–Motzkin elimination), are welcome.

Selected references

  • H. Weyl, Elementare Theorie der konvexen Polyeder, Commentarii Mathematici Helvetici (1935), 290–306. https://doi.org/10.1007/bf01292722
  • H. Weyl, The elementary theory of convex polyhedra, in: H. W. Kuhn, A. W. Tucker (eds.), Contributions to the Theory of Games I, Annals of Mathematics Studies 24, Princeton University Press, 1950.
  • J. Farkas, Theorie der einfachen Ungleichungen, Journal für die reine und angewandte Mathematik 124 (1902), 1–27. https://doi.org/10.1515/crll.1902.124.1
  • H. Minkowski, Geometrie der Zahlen, Teubner, Leipzig, 1896/1910.
  • A. Schrijver, Theory of Linear and Integer Programming, Wiley, 1986, §7.2 (Minkowski–Weyl).
13 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
AnalysisOperations Research·Captain: mikedeng1

A Nonsmooth Version of Newton's Method III: Semismoothness of the Augmented Lagrangian GradientResearch Paper

Motivation

The augmented Lagrangian method (method of multipliers) of Hestenes, Powell and Rockafellar solves a constrained nonlinear program by repeatedly minimizing an unconstrained merit function in the primal variables and then updating the multipliers. For inequality constraints, the augmented Lagrangian in the form the paper takes from Rockafellar (Rockafellar 1981) is continuously differentiable but not twice differentiable, even when all problem data are smooth: its Hessian jumps across the surfaces where a constraint switches between the "active" and "inactive" formula. Newton's method for the inner minimization therefore has no classical Hessian to work with on those surfaces.

Qi and Sun (Math. Programming 58, 1993) extended Newton's method to equations F(x)=0F(x) = 0F(x)=0 with FFF locally Lipschitz, replacing the Jacobian by an element of Clarke's generalized Jacobian, and proved local superlinear convergence when FFF is semismooth. Section 4 of the paper, an example suggested by Rockafellar, shows that the gradient of the augmented Lagrangian of a C2C^2C2 program is semismooth, so the nonsmooth Newton method applies to the stationarity equation ∇Lr=0\nabla L_r = 0∇Lr​=0. This mission formalizes that result, Theorem 4.1.

Setting

Let f0,f1,…,fm:Rn→Rf_0, f_1, \dots, f_m : \mathbb{R}^n \to \mathbb{R}f0​,f1​,…,fm​:Rn→R be of class C2C^2C2 and consider

(NLP)min⁡f0(x)  s.t.  fi(x)=0, i=1,…,p,fi(x)≤0, i=p+1,…,m.(4.1)\text{(NLP)}\quad \min f_0(x)\ \text{ s.t. }\ f_i(x) = 0,\ i = 1,\dots,p,\qquad f_i(x) \le 0,\ i = p+1,\dots,m. \tag{4.1}(NLP)minf0​(x)  s.t.  fi​(x)=0, i=1,…,p,fi​(x)≤0, i=p+1,…,m.(4.1)

Fix r>0r > 0r>0. For a constraint value aaa and a multiplier yyy put

ϕ(r,a,y)={ya+12ra2,y+ra≥0,−12ry2,y+ra≤0,\phi(r, a, y) = \begin{cases} y a + \tfrac12 r a^2, & y + r a \ge 0,\\ -\tfrac{1}{2r} y^2, & y + r a \le 0,\end{cases}ϕ(r,a,y)={ya+21​ra2,−2r1​y2,​y+ra≥0,y+ra≤0,​

(the two cases agree when y+ra=0y + ra = 0y+ra=0). The augmented Lagrangian is the function of (x,y)∈Rn×Rm(x, y) \in \mathbb{R}^n \times \mathbb{R}^m(x,y)∈Rn×Rm

Lr(x,y)=f0(x)+∑i=1p(yifi(x)+12rfi(x)2)+∑i=p+1mϕ(r,fi(x),yi).L_r(x, y) = f_0(x) + \sum_{i=1}^{p}\Big(y_i f_i(x) + \tfrac12 r f_i(x)^2\Big) + \sum_{i=p+1}^{m} \phi\big(r, f_i(x), y_i\big).Lr​(x,y)=f0​(x)+i=1∑p​(yi​fi​(x)+21​rfi​(x)2)+i=p+1∑m​ϕ(r,fi​(x),yi​).

For a locally Lipschitz map FFF between finite-dimensional spaces, let DFD_FDF​ be the set where FFF is differentiable. Clarke's generalized Jacobian is ∂F(x)=co{lim⁡JF(xi):xi→x, xi∈DF}\partial F(x) = \mathrm{co}\{\lim JF(x_i) : x_i \to x,\ x_i \in D_F\}∂F(x)=co{limJF(xi​):xi​→x, xi​∈DF​}. FFF is semismooth at xxx if it is locally Lipschitz near xxx and, for every direction hhh, the limit of Vh′V h'Vh′ over V∈∂F(x+th′)V \in \partial F(x + t h')V∈∂F(x+th′), h′→hh' \to hh′→h, t↓0t \downarrow 0t↓0, exists.

For a single constraint function ggg the proof works with η(x,s)=ϕ(r,g(x),s)\eta(x, s) = \phi(r, g(x), s)η(x,s)=ϕ(r,g(x),s) on Rn×R\mathbb{R}^n \times \mathbb{R}Rn×R, and with the surface s+rg(x)=0s + r g(x) = 0s+rg(x)=0 on which the two formulas for ϕ\phiϕ meet.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.1

For r>0r > 0r>0 and f0,…,fm∈C2f_0, \dots, f_m \in C^2f0​,…,fm​∈C2:

Lr∈C1,∇Lr semismooth at (x,y) whenever ∃ i>p: yi+rfi(x)=0,L_r \in C^1, \qquad \nabla L_r \text{ semismooth at } (x,y) \text{ whenever } \exists\, i > p:\ y_i + r f_i(x) = 0,Lr​∈C1,∇Lr​ semismooth at (x,y) whenever ∃i>p: yi​+rfi​(x)=0, ∇Lr∈C1 near (x,y) whenever yi+rfi(x)≠0 for all i>p.\nabla L_r \in C^1 \text{ near } (x, y) \text{ whenever } y_i + r f_i(x) \neq 0 \text{ for all } i > p.∇Lr​∈C1 near (x,y) whenever yi​+rfi​(x)=0 for all i>p.

All three clauses are the theorem; the last two together cover every point.

Milestones

  1. η∈C1\eta \in C^1η∈C1, with ∇η(x,s)=((s+rg(x))∇g(x), g(x))\nabla\eta(x,s) = \big((s + r g(x))\nabla g(x),\ g(x)\big)∇η(x,s)=((s+rg(x))∇g(x), g(x)) if s+rg(x)≥0s + r g(x) \ge 0s+rg(x)≥0 and (0,−s/r)(0, -s/r)(0,−s/r) if s+rg(x)≤0s + r g(x) \le 0s+rg(x)≤0, and ∇η\nabla \eta∇η is locally Lipschitz.
  2. Eq. (4.2): the Hessian of η\etaη on each side of the surface, and ∇η∈C1\nabla\eta \in C^1∇η∈C1 near every point off it.
  3. Eq. (4.7): if sˉ+rg(xˉ)=0\bar s + r g(\bar x) = 0sˉ+rg(xˉ)=0 and sˉ+tjαj+rg(xˉ+tjhj)=0\bar s + t_j\alpha_j + r g(\bar x + t_j h_j) = 0sˉ+tj​αj​+rg(xˉ+tj​hj​)=0 with hj→hh_j \to hhj​→h, αj→α\alpha_j \to \alphaαj​→α, tj↓0t_j \downarrow 0tj​↓0, then α+r∇g(xˉ)Th=0\alpha + r\nabla g(\bar x)^{\mathsf T} h = 0α+r∇g(xˉ)Th=0.
  4. ∇η\nabla\eta∇η is semismooth, jointly in (x,s)(x, s)(x,s), at every point of the surface.

Significance

The result places the inner problem of the augmented Lagrangian method inside the scope of the paper's convergence theory: with F=∇LrF = \nabla L_rF=∇Lr​, the generalized-Jacobian Newton iteration converges locally superlinearly at a root where every element of ∂F\partial F∂F is nonsingular. Its practical content is that second-order methods can be run on LrL_rLr​ even though LrL_rLr​ is only C1C^{1}C1, with the elements of ∂∇Lr\partial \nabla L_r∂∇Lr​ playing the role of Hessians. The same pattern (a C1C^1C1 merit function with semismooth gradient) recurs in extended linear-quadratic programming and in semismooth Newton methods for complementarity problems.

The theorem is proved in the paper by direct computation. As far as a search of the platform showed, none of the objects involved (Clarke's generalized Jacobian, semismoothness, Rockafellar's augmented Lagrangian) has a published formalization there, and Mathlib has none of them. The mission produces a machine-checked version of the computation and, as a by-product, reusable statements about C1C^1C1 functions obtained by gluing two C2C^2C2 pieces along a hypersurface.

Difficulty

Clauses 1 and 3 are calculus with a case split: one has to check that the two formulas for ϕ\phiϕ and for its gradient match on the surface. Clause 2 is where the argument is not routine. On the surface, ∇η\nabla\eta∇η is not differentiable, and the generalized Jacobian ∂∇η\partial\nabla\eta∂∇η there contains convex combinations of the two one-sided Hessians of (4.2). Semismoothness asks that V(h′,α′)V(h', \alpha')V(h′,α′) have a single limit over all such VVV, for all approaches (h′,α′)→(h,α)(h', \alpha') \to (h, \alpha)(h′,α′)→(h,α), t↓0t \downarrow 0t↓0, including approaches that cross the surface infinitely often. The two one-sided Hessians are different matrices, so no single derivative describes ∇η\nabla\eta∇η near the surface, and the existence of the limit must be shown for approaches that alternate between the two sides and for the convex combinations that ∂∇η\partial\nabla\eta∂∇η contains on the surface itself. General theorems that piecewise-smooth maps are semismooth appear in later literature but are not available in Mathlib, so they cannot be invoked as a shortcut. A second obstacle is infrastructure: Mathlib has no generalized Jacobian, so every fact about ∂∇η\partial\nabla\eta∂∇η (which limits of derivatives occur near the surface) must be derived from the definition.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn and Rm\mathbb{R}^mRm are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) and EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin m); LrL_rLr​ is a function on their product, and η\etaη on EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) × ℝ.
  • The constraint index i∈{1,…,m}i \in \{1,\dots,m\}i∈{1,…,m} is i : Fin m with paper index i.val + 1; equality constraints are i.val < p, inequality constraints p ≤ i.val. The paper's implicit p≤mp \le mp≤m is not assumed (for p>mp > mp>m there are no inequality constraints).
  • The paper's first sum prints h(ri,fi(x),yi)h(r_i, f_i(x), y_i)h(ri​,fi​(x),yi​); the single rrr is used, as in the paper's definition of hhh.
  • ϕ\phiϕ uses the first branch when y+ra≥0y + ra \ge 0y+ra≥0; the branches agree on the boundary. Every statement assumes r>0r > 0r>0.
  • C2C^2C2 is ContDiff ℝ 2 on all of Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn; "smooth" is the paper's continuously differentiable, ContDiffAt ℝ 1 of the gradient at the point.
  • ∇Lr\nabla L_r∇Lr​ and ∇η\nabla\eta∇η are Fréchet derivatives, valued in continuous linear functionals; semismoothness is invariant under the Riesz isometry to gradient vectors and under equivalent norms on the domain (Mathlib's product has the sup norm).
  • The Jacobian in Clarke's definition is fderiv, limits are along sequences, and no closure is taken in the convex hull. Semismoothness is the explicit ε\varepsilonε–δ\deltaδ form of the paper's limit, uniform over V∈∂F(x+th′)V \in \partial F(x + th')V∈∂F(x+th′).
  • Hessians in (4.2) are stated as the Fréchet derivative of the gradient map applied to a direction.

A formalization that states only Lr∈C1L_r \in C^1Lr​∈C1, or only the semismoothness of one term η\etaη, is not Theorem 4.1; the goal contains all three clauses for the full LrL_rLr​. The combination step from the terms η\etaη to LrL_rLr​ uses that sums of semismooth maps and C1C^1C1 maps with locally Lipschitz derivative are semismooth; the paper cites this without proof, and a solver will need to prove it.

Contributions welcome: the lemmas above; general facts about clarkeJac (it contains fderiv at points of strict differentiability; it is a singleton for C1C^1C1 maps; behaviour under sums and linear maps); and the semismoothness of sums.

Selected references

  • L. Qi, J. Sun, A nonsmooth version of Newton's method, Mathematical Programming 58 (1993) 353–367. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01581275
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Proximal subgradients, marginal values, and augmented Lagrangians in nonconvex optimization, Mathematics of Operations Research 6 (1981) 427–437. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.6.3.427
  • F. H. Clarke, Optimization and Nonsmooth Analysis, Wiley, 1983 (reprinted SIAM Classics in Applied Mathematics 5, 1990). https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611971309
  • R. Mifflin, Semismooth and semiconvex functions in constrained optimization, SIAM J. Control Optim. 15 (1977) 959–972. https://doi.org/10.1137/0315061
8 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Robust Mean-Covariance Solutions for Stochastic Optimization III: Concave Utilities with a Monotone Second Derivative Have a Closed-Form Robust ObjectiveResearch Paper

Motivation

A decision maker who chooses a portfolio x∈Rnx\in\mathbb R^nx∈Rn of risky assets with random return vector RRR receives the scalar return x′Rx'Rx′R and evaluates it by an expected utility E[u(x′R)]E[u(x'R)]E[u(x′R)]. In practice the law of RRR is not known; what can be estimated with some confidence are its mean μ\muμ and covariance Σ\SigmaΣ. The robust mean-covariance objective replaces the unknown law by the worst law consistent with these two moments:

U(x)=inf⁡{E[u(x′R)]:R has mean μ and covariance Σ}.U(x)=\inf\{E[u(x'R)] : R \text{ has mean } \mu \text{ and covariance } \Sigma\}.U(x)=inf{E[u(x′R)]:R has mean μ and covariance Σ}.

Ioana Popescu (Operations Research 55(1), 2007) showed that U(x)U(x)U(x) depends on xxx only through μx=x′μ\mu_x=x'\muμx​=x′μ and σx2=x′Σx\sigma_x^2=x'\Sigma xσx2​=x′Σx, and that for large classes of utilities it has a closed form or reduces to a one-dimensional search. This turns a robust stochastic program into a parametric mean-variance program, which is the practical point of the paper. This mission formalizes the closed form for concave utilities with a monotone second derivative (Proposition 7), a class that contains the exponential utility 1−e−ay1-e^{-ay}1−e−ay and all concave quadratics. The reduction to (μx,σx)(\mu_x,\sigma_x)(μx​,σx​) is the subject of the companion mission Robust Mean-Covariance Solutions for Stochastic Optimization I; the two-point case is mission II.

The underlying univariate question is a moment problem in the tradition of Chebyshev-type bounds: the extremal value of E[u(r)]E[u(r)]E[u(r)] over all laws with prescribed mean and variance. Scarf (1958) solved an instance for a piecewise-linear inventory cost, and Birge and Dulá (1991) treated two-point extremal laws on bounded domains.

Setting

Fix m∈Rm\in\mathbb Rm∈R and s≥0s\ge 0s≥0. The mean-variance class M(m,s2)\mathbb M_{(m,s^2)}M(m,s2)​ is the set of Borel probability measures ν\nuν on R\mathbb RR with ∫r2 dν<∞\int r^2\,d\nu<\infty∫r2dν<∞, ∫r dν=m\int r\,d\nu=m∫rdν=m and ∫(r−m)2 dν=s2\int (r-m)^2\,d\nu=s^2∫(r−m)2dν=s2 (Lean: MeanVarClass m (s ^ 2)). For a utility u:R→Ru:\mathbb R\to\mathbb Ru:R→R the robust objective is

U(m,s)=inf⁡{∫u dν:ν∈M(m,s2)},U(m,s)=\inf\Big\{\int u\,d\nu : \nu\in\mathbb M_{(m,s^2)}\Big\},U(m,s)=inf{∫udν:ν∈M(m,s2)​},

with min⁡\minmin read, as in the paper, "in the wide sense of inf⁡\infinf", so the value −∞-\infty−∞ is allowed. The paper's U(x)U(x)U(x) is U(μx,σx)U(\mu_x,\sigma_x)U(μx​,σx​).

For p∈(0,1)p\in(0,1)p∈(0,1) the two-point law rpr_prp​ puts mass ppp on b=m+(1−p)/p sb=m+\sqrt{(1-p)/p}\,sb=m+(1−p)/p​s and mass 1−p1-p1−p on a=m−p/(1−p) sa=m-\sqrt{p/(1-p)}\,sa=m−p/(1−p)​s; these are exactly the two-point laws of M(m,s2)\mathbb M_{(m,s^2)}M(m,s2)​. Its expected utility is the two-point objective (8),

U(p)=p u(b)+(1−p) u(a)(twoPointValue u m s p).U(p)=p\,u(b)+(1-p)\,u(a)\qquad(\texttt{twoPointValue u m s p}).U(p)=pu(b)+(1−p)u(a)(twoPointValue u m s p).

A supporting quadratic of uuu is q(y)=Ay2+By+Cq(y)=Ay^2+By+Cq(y)=Ay2+By+C with q≤uq\le uq≤u on R\mathbb RR; the set of their coefficients is Q\mathcal QQ. Since every r∼(m,s2)r\sim(m,s^2)r∼(m,s2) has E[q(r)]=A(m2+s2)+Bm+CE[q(r)]=A(m^2+s^2)+Bm+CE[q(r)]=A(m2+s2)+Bm+C, each element of Q\mathcal QQ gives a lower bound on U(m,s)U(m,s)U(m,s) (Proposition 3). The function uuu has the one-point support property with respect to (m,s2)(m,s^2)(m,s2) (Definition 3, OnePointSupportWrt u m s) if some supporting quadratic touches uuu at mmm and E[u(rp)]→E[q(rp)]E[u(r_p)]\to E[q(r_p)]E[u(rp​)]→E[q(rp​)] as p→0+p\to0^+p→0+ or as p→1−p\to1^-p→1−; it has one-point support (OnePointSupport u) if this holds for every mmm and every s≥0s\ge0s≥0.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 7

Let uuu be concave and twice differentiable with monotone u′′u''u′′.

(a) If u′u'u′ is convex, then

U(m,s)=u(m)+lim⁡y→−∞u′′(y) s22for all m, s.U(m,s)=u(m)+\lim_{y\to-\infty}u''(y)\,\frac{s^2}{2}\qquad\text{for all } m,\ s.U(m,s)=u(m)+y→−∞lim​u′′(y)2s2​for all m, s.

(b) If u′u'u′ is concave, the same holds with lim⁡y→+∞u′′(y)\lim_{y\to+\infty}u''(y)limy→+∞​u′′(y).

In each part the limit LLL of u′′u''u′′ exists in [−∞,0][-\infty,0][−∞,0]. When LLL is finite the goal asserts that uuu is integrable under every law of every class, that u(m)+Ls2/2u(m)+Ls^2/2u(m)+Ls2/2 is the greatest lower bound of the expected utilities, and that uuu has one-point support. When L=−∞L=-\inftyL=−∞ and s>0s>0s>0 it asserts U(m,s)=−∞U(m,s)=-\inftyU(m,s)=−∞.

Milestones

  1. Display (9): ∂U/∂p=u(b)−u(a)−(b−a) u′(b)+u′(a)2\partial U/\partial p=u(b)-u(a)-(b-a)\,\frac{u'(b)+u'(a)}{2}∂U/∂p=u(b)−u(a)−(b−a)2u′(b)+u′(a)​.
  2. For convex u′u'u′ and s>0s>0s>0, U(p)U(p)U(p) is nonincreasing on (0,1)(0,1)(0,1).
  3. Appendix (4): lim⁡p→1−U(p)=u(m)+s22lim⁡y→−∞u′′(y)\lim_{p\to1^-}U(p)=u(m)+\frac{s^2}{2}\lim_{y\to-\infty}u''(y)limp→1−​U(p)=u(m)+2s2​limy→−∞​u′′(y), including the value −∞-\infty−∞.
  4. Proposition 3: every E[u(r)]E[u(r)]E[u(r)] dominates every A(m2+s2)+Bm+CA(m^2+s^2)+Bm+CA(m2+s2)+Bm+C with (A,B,C)∈Q(A,B,C)\in\mathcal Q(A,B,C)∈Q.
  5. The function d(y)=u(y)−u(m)(y−m)2−u′(m)y−md(y)=\frac{u(y)-u(m)}{(y-m)^2}-\frac{u'(m)}{y-m}d(y)=(y−m)2u(y)−u(m)​−y−mu′(m)​ is nondecreasing on {y≠m}\{y \neq m\}{y=m} when u′u'u′ is convex.
  6. Appendix (5): q(y)=12u′′(−∞)(y−m)2+u′(m)(y−m)+u(m)q(y)=\tfrac12u''(-\infty)(y-m)^2+u'(m)(y-m)+u(m)q(y)=21​u′′(−∞)(y−m)2+u′(m)(y−m)+u(m) supports uuu, and inf⁡y≠md(y)=lim⁡y→−∞d(y)=12u′′(−∞)\inf_{y\ne m}d(y)=\lim_{y\to-\infty}d(y)=\tfrac12u''(-\infty)infy=m​d(y)=limy→−∞​d(y)=21​u′′(−∞).

An additional item states Proposition 8: a monotone convex uuu has one-point support and U(m,s)=u(m)U(m,s)=u(m)U(m,s)=u(m).

Significance

Proposition 7 turns the worst-case expected utility into a mean-variance criterion with an explicit risk weight: a prudent investor (u′u'u′ convex) is penalized by 12lim⁡y→−∞u′′(y)\tfrac12\lim_{y\to-\infty}u''(y)21​limy→−∞​u′′(y) per unit of variance, an imprudent one by the limit at +∞+\infty+∞. With Proposition 1, the robust portfolio problem becomes max⁡x u(μx)+12L σx2\max_x\ u(\mu_x)+\tfrac12 L\,\sigma_x^2maxx​ u(μx​)+21​Lσx2​, a concave mean-variance program. For exponential utility the weight is −∞-\infty−∞ (Example 3 of the paper), so the robust investor must eliminate variance entirely; this is a qualitative statement about robustness that follows only from the −∞-\infty−∞ case of the theorem.

The result is published with a proof in the appendix of the paper. It has, to the best of our search, no machine-checked version, and the platform currently holds no statement of Propositions 3, 7 or 8 or Definition 3. A formal proof would also check two points where the printed argument is incomplete: the proof's step "lim⁡y→−∞u′(y)=∞\lim_{y\to-\infty}u'(y)=\inftylimy→−∞​u′(y)=∞" fails for affine uuu, where the theorem nevertheless holds, and the claim that uuu "has one-point support" fails when lim⁡u′′=−∞\lim u''=-\inftylimu′′=−∞ (see the scope section). Related platform work on worst-case expectations over ambiguity sets is the mission Wasserstein Distributionally Robust Optimization II, which uses a different ambiguity set.

Difficulty

The infimum ranges over all laws with two prescribed moments, an infinite-dimensional set with no compactness, and in the relevant cases it is not attained. The natural first idea, restricting to two-point laws and minimizing over ppp, gives only an upper bound (display (7)), and here the minimizing ppp runs off to the boundary: the extremal law puts vanishing mass on a point escaping to −∞-\infty−∞. Identifying the limiting value requires controlling u(m−sq)/(1+q2)u(m-sq)/(1+q^2)u(m−sq)/(1+q2) as q→∞q\to\inftyq→∞, a second-order asymptotic statement about uuu at −∞-\infty−∞. The matching lower bound requires a supporting quadratic whose curvature is exactly 12lim⁡u′′\tfrac12\lim u''21​limu′′; showing that it lies below uuu everywhere, not only near mmm, is a global statement that uses the convexity of u′u'u′ on the whole line. The finite-limit and infinite-limit cases also behave differently: in the second, no supporting quadratic exists at all.

Formalization scope

Laws are Measure ℝ with IsProbabilityMeasure, finite second moment is MemLp id 2, and the class is parameterized by mean mmm and variance s2s^2s2 with s≥0s\ge0s≥0. The statements are univariate: U(x)U(x)U(x) of the paper is the univariate objective at (μx,σx)(\mu_x,\sigma_x)(μx​,σx​) by Proposition 1 of the paper (mission I). Derivatives are deriv u and deriv (deriv u); "twice differentiable" is differentiability of uuu and of u′u'u′. Limits of u′′u''u′′ are explicit hypotheses (Tendsto … atBot (𝓝 L) or Tendsto … atBot atBot), never limUnder. Limits in ppp are one-sided inside (0,1)(0,1)(0,1). Expectations under two-point laws are written by the explicit formula (8).

"Min" is never a real ⨅, which Lean evaluates to 000 on sets unbounded below. The finite case uses IsGLB together with integrability of uuu under every law of the class; the infinite case asserts that integrable laws with arbitrarily small expected utility exist; Proposition 3 is stated as "every value ≥\ge≥ every value". Proposition 3 assumes uuu integrable under the law; Proposition 8 takes the infimum over laws under which uuu is integrable, which for convex uuu loses nothing.

One correction to the printed statement: Proposition 7 opens with "then uuu has one-point support", which is false when lim⁡u′′=−∞\lim u''=-\inftylimu′′=−∞, since no quadratic lies below 1−e−ay1-e^{-ay}1−e−ay on R\mathbb RR. The formalization asserts one-point support only in the finite-limit case and the value −∞-\infty−∞ in the other. A formalization that took min⁡\minmin as a real infimum, dropped the integrability conjunct, or asserted one-point support unconditionally would be either trivially satisfiable or false; none of these is used.

A complete development needs: moments of two-point laws, a second-order l'Hôpital or Taylor argument at −∞-\infty−∞, the trapezoid inequality for convex functions, and Jensen-type integration of quadratic lower bounds. The mean-variance class, the two-point objective and the supporting-quadratic lemmas are reusable for mission II and for other moment-problem bounds. Proofs of any milestone, and of part (b), are welcome.

Selected references

  • I. Popescu, Robust Mean-Covariance Solutions for Stochastic Optimization, Operations Research 55(1):98–112, 2007. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1060.0353
  • H. Scarf, A min-max solution of an inventory problem, in Studies in the Mathematical Theory of Inventory and Production, Stanford University Press, 1958.
  • J. R. Birge, J. H. Dulá, Bounding separable recourse functions with limited distribution information, Annals of Operations Research 30, 1991.
  • S. Karlin, W. J. Studden, Tchebycheff Systems: With Applications in Analysis and Statistics, Interscience, 1966.
11 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationGraph TheoryLinear algebra+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Lifts of Convex Sets and Cone Factorizations III: Stable Set Polytopes Have No Small Semidefinite LiftsResearch Paper

Motivation

Many polytopes of combinatorial optimization have exponentially many facets, yet linear optimization over them is tractable because they are projections of simpler convex sets: affine slices of a nonnegative orthant (linear programming) or of the cone of positive semidefinite matrices (semidefinite programming). The size of such a representation, the number of variables of the extended formulation, is the natural measure of how compactly a polytope can be optimized over. Yannakakis (Expressing combinatorial optimization problems by linear programs, JCSS 1991) characterized polyhedral representations through nonnegative factorizations of the slack matrix. Gouveia, Parrilo and Thomas (arXiv:1111.3164, Mathematics of Operations Research 2013) extended the characterization to lifts into arbitrary closed convex cones, in particular to cones of positive semidefinite matrices.

The stable set polytope of a graph is the standard test case. For a perfect graph on nnn vertices it is a linear image of an affine slice of the cone of (n+1)×(n+1)(n+1)\times(n+1)(n+1)×(n+1) positive semidefinite matrices (Lovász's theta body construction, stated in the paper as Theorem 5.1 with a citation to Lovász & Schrijver, SIAM J. Optim. 1991); this is the reason the maximum weight stable set problem is solvable in polynomial time on perfect graphs. The question addressed by this mission is whether a smaller matrix size could suffice. Theorem 5.2 of Gouveia–Parrilo–Thomas answers it: for every graph on nnn vertices, matrices of size nnn do not suffice.

Setting

Let GGG be a graph with vertex set V={1,…,n}V = \{1,\dots,n\}V={1,…,n}. A set S⊆VS \subseteq VS⊆V is stable if no edge joins two of its elements, and its incidence vector χS∈{0,1}n\chi_S \in \{0,1\}^nχS​∈{0,1}n has (χS)i=1(\chi_S)_i = 1(χS​)i​=1 exactly when i∈Si \in Si∈S. The stable set polytope is

STAB(G)=conv{χS:S stable}⊆Rn.\mathrm{STAB}(G) = \mathrm{conv}\{\chi_S : S \text{ stable}\} \subseteq \mathbb R^n .STAB(G)=conv{χS​:S stable}⊆Rn.

Let S+k\mathcal S^k_+S+k​ be the cone of k×kk \times kk×k real symmetric positive semidefinite matrices, with the trace inner product ⟨A,B⟩=tr(AB)\langle A, B\rangle = \mathrm{tr}(AB)⟨A,B⟩=tr(AB), under which it is self-dual. For a closed convex cone KKK, a set CCC has a KKK-lift if C=π(K∩L)C = \pi(K \cap L)C=π(K∩L) for an affine subspace LLL and a linear map π\piπ; the lift is proper if LLL meets the interior of KKK.

For a polytope PPP with vertices p1,…,pvp_1,\dots,p_vp1​,…,pv​ and facet inequalities h1(x)≥0,…,hf(x)≥0h_1(x) \ge 0, \dots, h_f(x) \ge 0h1​(x)≥0,…,hf​(x)≥0, the slack matrix is the nonnegative v×fv\times fv×f matrix (hj(pi))(h_j(p_i))(hj​(pi​)). A KKK-factorization of a nonnegative matrix MMM assigns ai∈Ka^i \in Kai∈K to each row and bj∈K∗b^j \in K^*bj∈K∗ to each column with ⟨ai,bj⟩=Mij\langle a^i, b^j\rangle = M_{ij}⟨ai,bj⟩=Mij​. In Lean the objects are stab, HasPSDLift, HasConeLift, HasProperConeLift, IsSlackMatrix, HasConeFactorization and HasPSDFactorization in the namespace ConeLifts.StableSet.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.2

For every n≥1n \ge 1n≥1 and every graph GGG on nnn vertices,

¬ ∃ L, π:STAB(G)=π(S+n∩L).\neg\ \exists\, L,\ \pi:\quad \mathrm{STAB}(G) = \pi(\mathcal S^n_+ \cap L).¬ ∃L, π:STAB(G)=π(S+n​∩L).

The statement excludes all lifts, proper or not, and holds for every graph, perfect or not.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 3.3 (first sentence). If a full-dimensional polytope PPP with the origin in its interior has a proper KKK-lift, then every slack matrix of PPP admits a KKK-factorization.
  2. Rows of the submatrix. The origin and e1,…,ene_1,\dots,e_ne1​,…,en​ are vertices of STAB(G)\mathrm{STAB}(G)STAB(G).
  3. Columns of the submatrix. For n≥1n \ge 1n≥1, each {x∈STAB(G):xi=0}\{x \in \mathrm{STAB}(G) : x_i = 0\}{x∈STAB(G):xi​=0} is a facet, and some facet does not contain the origin.
  4. The core lemma. For every s∈Rns \in \mathbb R^ns∈Rn the block matrix
S′=(10nsIn)S' = \begin{pmatrix} 1 & 0_n \\ s & I_n\end{pmatrix}S′=(1s​0n​In​​)

has no S+n\mathcal S^n_+S+n​-factorization.

Significance

Theorem 5.2 shows that the semidefinite representation of STAB(G)\mathrm{STAB}(G)STAB(G) for perfect graphs has the smallest possible matrix size: n+1n+1n+1 cannot be lowered to nnn. As Remark 5.3 of the paper notes, the same argument shows that no polytope in Rn\mathbb R^nRn with a vertex at which it locally looks like the nonnegative orthant has an S+n\mathcal S^n_+S+n​-lift. It is also an instance of the factorization method: a statement about all possible semidefinite representations is reduced to a finite obstruction on a small submatrix of the slack matrix.

The theorem is proved in the paper. To the best of our knowledge no machine-checked proof of it, of the factorization theorem for cone lifts, or of any positive semidefinite lower bound for a polytope exists in Mathlib or on this platform. A formalization produces reusable statements about positive semidefinite factorizations, slack matrices and lifts, and a verified instance of the general lower-bound technique.

Difficulty

The step from lifts to factorizations is where the direct argument fails. Theorem 3.3 applies only to proper lifts and only to polytopes with the origin in their interior, while the goal concerns all lifts of a polytope that has the origin as a vertex. Applying Theorem 3.3 to STAB(G)\mathrm{STAB}(G)STAB(G) and an arbitrary lift therefore does not match its hypotheses, and the printed proof does not spell out how the two gaps are closed (see Formalization scope). Theorem 3.3 itself is a consequence of the general factorization theorem of the paper (Theorem 2.4), whose proof rests on conic duality. The core lemma about S′S'S′ is a statement about every family of 2(n+1)2(n+1)2(n+1) positive semidefinite matrices, so it cannot be settled by any finite search.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n); vertex i+1i+1i+1 of the paper is i : Fin n; graphs are SimpleGraph (Fin n) and stability is SimpleGraph.IsIndepSet. Vertices of a polytope are Set.extremePoints ℝ. S+k\mathcal S^k_+S+k​ is the set of real k×kk\times kk×k matrices satisfying Matrix.PosSemidef (which includes symmetry), and the ambient space of a positive semidefinite lift is all k×kk \times kk×k matrices; this does not change which sets have lifts, because a lift in the symmetric matrices extends linearly and a lift in all matrices restricts to them. Positive semidefinite factorizations require both factor families to be positive semidefinite and use tr(AiBj)\mathrm{tr}(A_iB_j)tr(Ai​Bj​).

Reading decisions: the goal assumes n≥1n \ge 1n≥1, the paper's meaning of "a graph with nnn vertices", since for n=0n = 0n=0 the polytope {0}\{0\}{0} is the image of S+0\mathcal S^0_+S+0​ and the printed statement fails. Milestone 3 also assumes n≥1n \ge 1n≥1, and so does Milestone 1 (Theorem 3.3): in R0\mathbb R^0R0 the point {0}\{0\}{0} has a proper lift to the whole space Rm\mathbb R^mRm, whose dual cone {0}\{0\}{0} cannot factor the slack matrix (1)(1)(1). In Milestone 4 the column ∗n*_n∗n​ is an arbitrary real vector. The slack matrices of Theorem 3.3 are encoded through the identification on p. 9 of the paper: rows are vertices of PPP, columns are extreme points yyy of the polar P∘={y:⟨x,y⟩≤1 ∀x∈P}P^\circ = \{y : \langle x, y \rangle \le 1\ \forall x \in P\}P∘={y:⟨x,y⟩≤1 ∀x∈P}, the canonical entry is 1−⟨p,y⟩1 - \langle p, y\rangle1−⟨p,y⟩, and every slack matrix is the canonical one with positively scaled columns. Facets in Milestone 3 are nonempty proper exposed faces of dimension one less than the polytope.

The goal must not be weakened to proper lifts, and lifts must use equality STAB(G)=π(S+n∩L)\mathrm{STAB}(G) = \pi(\mathcal S^n_+ \cap L)STAB(G)=π(S+n​∩L) with π\piπ linear and LLL affine; with inclusion, or with arbitrary maps, the statement becomes trivial or false. The core lemma is meaningful only with both factor families positive semidefinite; without that requirement S′S'S′ factors trivially.

Beyond the milestones, a complete proof of the goal needs two facts the paper uses without stating them as claims of this proof: (a) an S+n\mathcal S^n_+S+n​-lift that is not proper is a proper lift to a face of S+n\mathcal S^n_+S+n​ (p. 5), every face of S+n\mathcal S^n_+S+n​ is isomorphic to some S+r\mathcal S^r_+S+r​ with r≤nr \le nr≤n (Example 4.2, p. 12), and an S+r\mathcal S^r_+S+r​-factorization yields an S+n\mathcal S^n_+S+n​-factorization; (b) lifts are preserved by affine maps (Proposition 2.9, pp. 6–7), and translating a polytope changes its slack matrices only by positive column scalings, which is how Theorem 3.3 applies to STAB(G)\mathrm{STAB}(G)STAB(G), whose origin is a vertex rather than an interior point. Stating (a) and (b) as separate lemmas is welcome.

Needed infrastructure: positive semidefinite matrices and the trace pairing, the face structure of S+n\mathcal S^n_+S+n​, invariance of lifts under affine maps, and conic duality for Theorem 3.3. All of these are reusable beyond this mission. Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones, the bridging facts (a) and (b), and alternative routes to the goal.

Selected references

  • J. Gouveia, P. A. Parrilo, R. R. Thomas, Lifts of Convex Sets and Cone Factorizations, Mathematics of Operations Research 38(2):248–264, 2013. arXiv:1111.3164v2. https://arxiv.org/abs/1111.3164
  • M. Yannakakis, Expressing combinatorial optimization problems by linear programs, Journal of Computer and System Sciences 43(3):441–466, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-0000(91)90024-Y
  • L. Lovász, A. Schrijver, Cones of matrices and set-functions and 0-1 optimization, SIAM Journal on Optimization 1(2):166–190, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1137/0801013
14 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
CombinatoricsDiscrete GeometryOperations Research·Captain: Shuze Chen

Discrete Convex Analysis I: Valuated MatroidsTextbook

Motivation

Matroids abstract the combinatorial content of linear independence: which sets of columns of a matrix are independent, which are maximal (bases), and how bases relate to each other. This abstraction, isolated independently by Whitney (1935) and van der Waerden's school, turned out to be exactly the right level of generality for a large family of greedy and augmenting-path algorithms — a base of a matroid can always be reached from another by a sequence of single-element swaps, and this exchange property is what makes local search on bases correct and efficient.

A natural question, raised in the 1980s once matroid-based combinatorial optimization was mature, is what happens when bases are not merely present or absent but carry real-valued weights that must interact well with the exchange structure. Dress and Wenzel answered this with the notion of a valuated matroid: a real-valued function on the bases of a matroid satisfying a weighted strengthening of the exchange axiom. Their motivation was explicitly algorithmic — valuated matroids are exactly the structures for which a greedy algorithm computes an optimal basis under linear objectives, and more generally under the family of "tilted" objectives obtained by adding an arbitrary linear functional. Independently, valuated matroids arise from the classical Grassmann–Plücker relation applied to matrices over a field with a valuation (hence the name), connecting them to tropical geometry.

This mission formalizes the two theorems of Murota's Discrete Convex Analysis (2003, §2.4) that make this story precise: the classical correspondence between a matroid's base family and its rank function (Theorem 2.29), and the characterization of valuations by a perturbation-robustness property (Theorem 2.32). Theorem 2.32 is also historically the entry point of the book's central theme — it is the special case, for the two-valued lattice {0,1}V\{0,1\}^V{0,1}V, of the general local-exchange criterion for M-convex functions that occupies chapters 6 and 7.

Setting

Let VVV be a finite set (the ground set). A matroid on VVV is a pair (V,B)(V, \mathcal B)(V,B) where B\mathcal BB, the base family, is a nonempty family of subsets of VVV satisfying the simultaneous exchange axiom (B): for every J,J′∈BJ, J' \in \mathcal BJ,J′∈B and every i∈J∖J′i \in J \setminus J'i∈J∖J′, there exists j∈J′∖Jj \in J' \setminus Jj∈J′∖J such that both

J−i+j:=(J∖{i})∪{j}∈BandJ′+i−j:=(J′∖{j})∪{i}∈B.J - i + j := (J \setminus \{i\}) \cup \{j\} \in \mathcal B \quad\text{and}\quad J' + i - j := (J' \setminus \{j\}) \cup \{i\} \in \mathcal B.J−i+j:=(J∖{i})∪{j}∈BandJ′+i−j:=(J′∖{j})∪{i}∈B.

Equivalently (Theorem 2.29 below), a matroid can be described by its rank function ρ:2V→Z\rho : 2^V \to \mathbb Zρ:2V→Z, a set function satisfying:

  • (R1) 0≤ρ(X)≤∣X∣0 \le \rho(X) \le |X|0≤ρ(X)≤∣X∣ for every X⊆VX \subseteq VX⊆V;
  • (R2) monotonicity: X⊆Y  ⟹  ρ(X)≤ρ(Y)X \subseteq Y \implies \rho(X) \le \rho(Y)X⊆Y⟹ρ(X)≤ρ(Y);
  • (R3) submodularity: ρ(X)+ρ(Y)≥ρ(X∪Y)+ρ(X∩Y)\rho(X) + \rho(Y) \ge \rho(X \cup Y) + \rho(X \cap Y)ρ(X)+ρ(Y)≥ρ(X∪Y)+ρ(X∩Y).

A valuation of a base family B\mathcal BB is a function ω:B→R\omega : \mathcal B \to \mathbb Rω:B→R satisfying the axiom (VM): for every J,J′∈BJ, J' \in \mathcal BJ,J′∈B and i∈J∖J′i \in J \setminus J'i∈J∖J′, there is j∈J′∖Jj \in J' \setminus Jj∈J′∖J with J−i+j,J′+i−j∈BJ - i + j, J' + i - j \in \mathcal BJ−i+j,J′+i−j∈B and

ω(J)+ω(J′)≤ω(J−i+j)+ω(J′+i−j).\omega(J) + \omega(J') \le \omega(J - i + j) + \omega(J' + i - j).ω(J)+ω(J′)≤ω(J−i+j)+ω(J′+i−j).

The pair (V,ω)(V, \omega)(V,ω) is then a valuated matroid. For p:V→Rp : V \to \mathbb Rp:V→R, the perturbation of ω\omegaω by ppp is

ω[−p](J)=ω(J)−∑j∈Jp(j).\omega[-p](J) = \omega(J) - \sum_{j \in J} p(j).ω[−p](J)=ω(J)−j∈J∑​p(j).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.32 (the valuated matroid characterization)

ω is a valuation of B  ⟺  ∀ p:V→R, {J∈B:ω[−p](J′)≤ω[−p](J) ∀J′∈B} is a nonempty family satisfying (B).\omega \text{ is a valuation of } \mathcal B \iff \forall\, p : V \to \mathbb R,\ \{J \in \mathcal B : \omega[-p](J') \le \omega[-p](J)\ \forall J' \in \mathcal B\} \text{ is a nonempty family satisfying (B)}.ω is a valuation of B⟺∀p:V→R, {J∈B:ω[−p](J′)≤ω[−p](J) ∀J′∈B} is a nonempty family satisfying (B).

The right-hand side says: for every linear perturbation ppp, the set of ω[−p]\omega[-p]ω[−p]-maximal bases is again the base family of a matroid. The universal quantifier over ppp is not optional — a version of this statement quantified over a single fixed ppp is either vacuous or false, and does not capture what makes valuated matroids useful.

Milestone: Theorem 2.29 (the base-family / rank-function correspondence)

The maps

ρ(X)=max⁡{∣X∩J∣:J∈B},B={J⊆V:ρ(J)=∣J∣=ρ(V)}\rho(X) = \max\{|X \cap J| : J \in \mathcal B\}, \qquad \mathcal B = \{J \subseteq V : \rho(J) = |J| = \rho(V)\}ρ(X)=max{∣X∩J∣:J∈B},B={J⊆V:ρ(J)=∣J∣=ρ(V)}

are mutually inverse bijections between nonempty families satisfying (B) and set functions satisfying (R1)-(R3). This is weaker groundwork than the goal, stated first because it fixes the exact axiomatic vocabulary — (B) and (R) — that Theorem 2.32 is built on.

Significance

The result itself. Theorem 2.32 is the reason valuated matroids are the right object for weighted combinatorial optimization on matroids: it says a function on bases behaves correctly under every linear re-weighting of the ground set exactly when it satisfies the local exchange inequality (VM). This is what guarantees, for instance, that a greedy algorithm which is correct for the unweighted matroid extends correctly to families of tilted objectives, and it is the germ of the general local-optimality criterion for M-convex functions (chapters 6–7), which underlies most of the algorithmic content of the rest of the book. Theorem 2.29 is the classical result — due jointly to the development of matroid theory from the 1930s onward — that the base-exchange and rank-submodularity axiomatizations of a matroid carry the same information; it is the finite, unweighted precursor of Theorem 2.32.

Formalizing it. Neither theorem has a machine-checked proof on the platform prior to this mission (see Formalization scope for the prior-art check). Theorem 2.29's own proof is elementary but has two independent halves (each map preserves its target axiom class, and the two maps compose to the identity in both directions) that must all be established; Theorem 2.32's proof, as given in the source, defers entirely to a later, more general chapter-6 theorem, so a solver working only from this mission must either reconstruct a direct combinatorial argument for this special case or await chunk 06 (DiscreteConvex.MConvexFunctions, a separate mission) and specialize its main theorem.

Difficulty

The obvious approach to Theorem 2.32 — fix an optimal basis JJJ for ω[−p]\omega[-p]ω[−p] and try to show the exchange condition on maximizers directly from (VM) — proves one direction (VM implies the maximizer property) in a few lines, since perturbing does not change which exchange moves are available. The converse is the substantial direction: from "the maximizer set is always a matroid, for every ppp," one must recover the single global inequality (VM) that must hold for all pairs J,J′∈BJ, J' \in \mathcal BJ,J′∈B, not just optimal ones. The standard argument constructs, for a given non-optimal pair, a perturbation ppp under which that specific pair becomes simultaneously optimal, and this construction is exactly the step the book skips by citing chapter 6's general theorem. A formalization attempting to bypass this by only checking the maximizer property for a finite or generic sample of perturbations would trivialize the statement to something false or vacuous — a pitfall the goal's explicit ∀ p is designed to prevent.

Formalization scope

The ground set VVV is a Fintype with DecidableEq; 2V2^V2V is represented as Finset (Finset V), and V→RV \to \mathbb RV→R as a plain function type. The rank function is Z\mathbb ZZ-valued (matching the book's own convention for matroid rank, as opposed to the R\mathbb RR-valued conventions used from chapter 6 onward for general M-convex functions); RankOfFamily is implemented with Finset.sup over N\mathbb NN rather than a partial max', so that it is a total function — its junk value at the empty family is never invoked, since every hypothesis in this mission supplies nonemptiness explicitly, matching the book's own phrasing.

A trivializing formalization of the goal is one that quantifies over a single fixed ppp, or allows B\mathcal BB to be empty; both are explicitly excluded by keeping B.Nonempty\mathcal B.\text{Nonempty}B.Nonempty a hypothesis and ppp universally quantified inside the theorem statement itself.

Checked against Mathlib (commit 0df444a360eaa60ab8c11dca51a86af692955474): Mathlib's Matroid structure is axiomatized via the single-element (asymmetric) exchange property, classically but not definitionally equivalent to Murota's simultaneous axiom (B) used throughout this book, and Mathlib provides no constructor recovering a base family or a Matroid from a bare rank function satisfying (R1)-(R3). Theorem 2.29 is therefore genuine, reusable infrastructure, not a restatement of existing Mathlib API. No reference item was found on the platform for either theorem (GET /theorems?q=matroid, q=valuated matroid return only unrelated tropical-geometry and k-server results). Contributions to a shared DiscreteConvex.Combinatorial definitions layer (the exchange and rank axioms) are welcome from later chunks of this series that build on matroid or base-polyhedron structure.

Selected references

  • K. Murota, Discrete Convex Analysis, SIAM, 2003. DOI: 10.1137/1.9780898718508.
  • H. Whitney, "On the abstract properties of linear dependence," American Journal of Mathematics, 57(3), 1935, pp. 509–533.
  • A. W. M. Dress, W. Wenzel, "Valuated matroids," Advances in Mathematics, 93(2), 1992, pp. 214–250.
  • R. A. Brualdi, "Comments on bases in dependence structures," Bulletin of the Australian Mathematical Society, 1(2), 1969, pp. 161–167.
13 thms4 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Machine LearningOperations ResearchProbability+1·Captain: mikedeng1

A Distributional Interpretation of Robust Optimization II: Box-Robust Sample Average Optimization Is ConsistentResearch Paper

Why robustify a sampled stochastic program

Many decision problems under uncertainty take the form of a stochastic program: choose a decision vvv from a feasible set F\mathcal FF to maximise the expected utility Ex∼μ[f(v,x)]\mathbb E_{x\sim\mu}[f(v,x)]Ex∼μ​[f(v,x)], where the distribution μ\muμ of the uncertain parameter x∈Rmx\in\mathbb R^mx∈Rm is known only through i.i.d. samples x1,…,xnx_1,\dots,x_nx1​,…,xn​. The standard remedy, sample average approximation, maximises 1n∑if(v,xi)\frac1n\sum_i f(v,x_i)n1​∑i​f(v,xi​) instead. Its consistency (convergence of the optimal expected utility of its solutions to the true optimum) is classical, but it needs regularity assumptions of its own, for example those of King and Wets (Stochastics and Stochastic Reports, 1991), cited on p. 98 of the paper; the paper presents its construction as a route to consistency under weaker conditions.

Robust optimization (RO) takes a different route: it protects each sample by an uncertainty set and optimises against the worst point in it. Xu, Caramanis and Mannor (Math. Oper. Res. 2012) show that RO over several overlapping uncertainty sets is equivalent to a distributionally robust stochastic program (their Theorem 2.1, the subject of mission I of this series). Section 3 of the paper uses that equivalence to show that a specific robustification of the sampled problem, with ℓ∞\ell_\inftyℓ∞​ boxes of shrinking radius around each sample, is consistent under only boundedness and equicontinuity of fff. This mission formalizes that result, Theorem 3.1.

Setting

Equip Rm\mathbb R^mRm with the sup norm ∥z∥∞=max⁡k∣zk∣\|z\|_\infty=\max_k|z_k|∥z∥∞​=maxk​∣zk​∣, its Borel σ\sigmaσ-algebra and Lebesgue measure dxdxdx. The data are:

  • a set of decisions VVV and a nonempty feasible set F⊆V\mathcal F\subseteq VF⊆V;
  • a utility f:V×Rm→Rf:V\times\mathbb R^m\to\mathbb Rf:V×Rm→R, Borel measurable in xxx for each vvv;
  • a true density h∗h^*h∗ on Rm\mathbb R^mRm (nonnegative, ∫h∗ dx=1\int h^*\,dx=1∫h∗dx=1) and i.i.d. samples x1,x2,…x_1,x_2,\dotsx1​,x2​,… with distribution h∗(x) dxh^*(x)\,dxh∗(x)dx;
  • radii ϵ(n)>0\epsilon(n)>0ϵ(n)>0.

For a sample x1,…,xnx_1,\dots,x_nx1​,…,xn​ the boxes are Zi={xi+δ∣∥δ∥∞≤ϵ(n)}\mathcal Z_i=\{x_i+\delta\mid\|\delta\|_\infty\le\epsilon(n)\}Zi​={xi​+δ∣∥δ∥∞​≤ϵ(n)}, and the box-robust sample objective is

Jn(v)=1n∑i=1n inf⁡∥δi∥∞≤ϵ(n)f(v,xi+δi)=∑i=1n1ninf⁡xi′∈Zif(v,xi′).J_n(v)=\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n\ \inf_{\|\delta_i\|_\infty\le\epsilon(n)}f(v,x_i+\delta_i)=\sum_{i=1}^n\frac1n\inf_{x_i'\in\mathcal Z_i}f(v,x_i').Jn​(v)=n1​i=1∑n​ ∥δi​∥∞​≤ϵ(n)inf​f(v,xi​+δi​)=i=1∑n​n1​xi′​∈Zi​inf​f(v,xi′​).

The RO solution v(n)v(n)v(n) is a maximiser of JnJ_nJn​ over F\mathcal FF. The equicontinuity modulus of fff is

d(ϵ)=sup⁡v, x, ∥δ∥∞≤ϵ∣f(v,x)−f(v,x+δ)∣.d(\epsilon)=\sup_{v,\,x,\ \|\delta\|_\infty\le\epsilon}|f(v,x)-f(v,x+\delta)|.d(ϵ)=v,x, ∥δ∥∞​≤ϵsup​∣f(v,x)−f(v,x+δ)∣.

The proof works with the distribution set Pn\mathcal P_nPn​ of probability measures μ\muμ with μ(⋃i∈SZi)≥∣S∣/n\mu(\bigcup_{i\in S}\mathcal Z_i)\ge|S|/nμ(⋃i∈S​Zi​)≥∣S∣/n for every S⊆{1,…,n}S\subseteq\{1,\dots,n\}S⊆{1,…,n}, and with the uniform box kernel density estimator

hn(x)=(nϵ(n)m)−1∑i=1nK(x−xiϵ(n)),K(z)=1(∥z∥∞≤1)2m.h_n(x)=(n\epsilon(n)^m)^{-1}\sum_{i=1}^nK\Big(\frac{x-x_i}{\epsilon(n)}\Big),\qquad K(z)=\frac{\mathbf 1(\|z\|_\infty\le1)}{2^m}.hn​(x)=(nϵ(n)m)−1i=1∑n​K(ϵ(n)x−xi​​),K(z)=2m1(∥z∥∞​≤1)​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.1 (p. 98)

Assume ∣f(v,x)∣≤C|f(v,x)|\le C∣f(v,x)∣≤C for all v,xv,xv,x; d(ϵ)→0d(\epsilon)\to0d(ϵ)→0 as ϵ↓0\epsilon\downarrow0ϵ↓0; ϵ(n)↓0\epsilon(n)\downarrow0ϵ(n)↓0 and nϵ(n)m↑∞n\epsilon(n)^m\uparrow\inftynϵ(n)m↑∞. Then for every choice of maximisers v(n)v(n)v(n), with probability one,

lim⁡n→∞∫Rmf(v(n),x) h∗(x) dx=sup⁡v∈F∫Rmf(v,x) h∗(x) dx.\lim_{n\to\infty}\int_{\mathbb R^m}f(v(n),x)\,h^*(x)\,dx=\sup_{v\in\mathcal F}\int_{\mathbb R^m}f(v,x)\,h^*(x)\,dx .n→∞lim​∫Rm​f(v(n),x)h∗(x)dx=v∈Fsup​∫Rm​f(v,x)h∗(x)dx.

Milestones (proof of Theorem 3.1, p. 99)

  1. hnh_nhn​ is the density of a probability measure in Pn\mathcal P_nPn​.
  2. Jn(v)≤∫f(v,x) hn(x) dxJ_n(v)\le\int f(v,x)\,h_n(x)\,dxJn​(v)≤∫f(v,x)hn​(x)dx for every vvv.
  3. Oscillation over a box: sup⁡Zif(v,⋅)−inf⁡Zif(v,⋅)≤d(2ϵ(n))\sup_{\mathcal Z_i}f(v,\cdot)-\inf_{\mathcal Z_i}f(v,\cdot)\le d(2\epsilon(n))supZi​​f(v,⋅)−infZi​​f(v,⋅)≤d(2ϵ(n)).
  4. Eq. (7): with Mn=C∫∣hn−h∗∣ dxM_n=C\int|h_n-h^*|\,dxMn​=C∫∣hn​−h∗∣dx, for every vvv,
Jn(v)−Mn≤∫f(v,x)h∗(x) dx≤Jn(v)+Mn+d(2ϵ(n)).J_n(v)-M_n\le\int f(v,x)h^*(x)\,dx\le J_n(v)+M_n+d(2\epsilon(n)).Jn​(v)−Mn​≤∫f(v,x)h∗(x)dx≤Jn​(v)+Mn​+d(2ϵ(n)).
  1. Strong L1L^1L1 consistency of the box kernel density estimator: if ϵ(n)→0\epsilon(n)\to0ϵ(n)→0 and nϵ(n)m→∞n\epsilon(n)^m\to\inftynϵ(n)m→∞, then ∫∣hn−h∗∣ dx→0\int|h_n-h^*|\,dx\to0∫∣hn​−h∗∣dx→0 almost surely.

Milestones 1–4 are deterministic statements about a fixed sample; milestone 5 is the only probabilistic input.

Significance

Theorem 3.1 gives consistency of a tractable robust reformulation of a sampled stochastic program under conditions the paper notes are weaker than those of King and Wets for sampled stochastic programs: fff need only be bounded and equicontinuous in xxx, uniformly in vvv, and the true distribution need only have a density. It also gives an explicit schedule for the size of the uncertainty set, ϵ(n)→0\epsilon(n)\to0ϵ(n)→0 with nϵ(n)m→∞n\epsilon(n)^m\to\inftynϵ(n)m→∞, the bandwidth condition of kernel density estimation. Section 4 of the paper applies the same distributional interpretation to regularised learning methods such as the support vector machine and the Lasso.

The result is proved in the paper, with the L1L^1L1 consistency of kernel density estimators (Devroye 1983; Devroye and Györfi 1985) cited rather than proved. No part of it is formalized in Lean or on this platform as far as a search of the platform found. A complete development would produce, besides Theorem 3.1, a machine-checked strong L1L^1L1 consistency theorem for kernel density estimators, which is a basic result of nonparametric statistics in its own right.

Difficulty

The deterministic part (milestones 1–4) is measure-theoretic bookkeeping: the kernel integrates to one only because the box is a sup-norm ball of volume (2ϵ)m(2\epsilon)^m(2ϵ)m, and every infimum and supremum must be handled with care, since fff need not attain them.

The obstacle is milestone 5. Almost-sure L1L^1L1 convergence of hnh_nhn​ to an arbitrary density h∗h^*h∗, with no continuity or support assumption, does not follow from the strong law of large numbers applied pointwise: hn(x)h_n(x)hn​(x) is an average of nnn terms whose law changes with nnn through ϵ(n)\epsilon(n)ϵ(n), and almost-sure convergence at each fixed xxx does not give convergence of the integral along a single sample path. The theorem needs both a bias estimate valid for every integrable density and a concentration estimate for the random L1L^1L1 error. Mathlib has Lebesgue differentiation and the strong law, but no kernel density estimator and no such concentration result.

Formalization scope

  • Rm\mathbb R^mRm is Fin m → ℝ, whose Mathlib norm is the sup norm; boxes are Metric.closedBall. The integrals ∫f(v,x)h∗(x) dx\int f(v,x)h^*(x)\,dx∫f(v,x)h∗(x)dx are Bochner integrals against Lebesgue measure of integrable integrands.
  • The samples are a sequence X : ℕ → Ω → Fin m → ℝ on a probability space, independent (iIndepFun) and each with law volume.withDensity h*; x1,x2,…x_1,x_2,\dotsx1​,x2​,… become X 0, X 1, …, and the nnn-th problem uses the first nnn. "With probability one" is ∀ᵐ ω ∂P.
  • The goal quantifies over every selection v(n)v(n)v(n) of maximisers, with no measurability assumed; a version with one chosen maximiser would be weaker and is ruled out.
  • Readings and corrections of the printed text:
    • the kernel argument printed (x−xi)/ϵ(x-x_i)/\epsilon(x−xi​)/ϵ on p. 98 is read as (x−xi)/ϵ(n)(x-x_i)/\epsilon(n)(x−xi​)/ϵ(n), as the proof on p. 99 writes it;
    • "max⁡v,x∣f(v,x)∣≤C\max_{v,x}|f(v,x)|\le Cmaxv,x​∣f(v,x)∣≤C" is read as the uniform bound ∣f∣≤C|f|\le C∣f∣≤C and the "max" in d(ϵ)d(\epsilon)d(ϵ) as a supremum;
    • "d(ϵ)↓0d(\epsilon)\downarrow0d(ϵ)↓0" is read as d(ϵ)→0d(\epsilon)\to0d(ϵ)→0 as ϵ↓0\epsilon\downarrow0ϵ↓0;
    • implicit hypotheses made explicit: F≠∅\mathcal F\ne\emptysetF=∅, ϵ(n)>0\epsilon(n)>0ϵ(n)>0, measurability of f(v,⋅)f(v,\cdot)f(v,⋅), h∗h^*h∗ a Lebesgue density;
    • the monotonicity in "ϵ(n)↓0\epsilon(n)\downarrow0ϵ(n)↓0, nϵ(n)m↑∞n\epsilon(n)^m\uparrow\inftynϵ(n)m↑∞" is kept in the goal; milestone 5 uses the limits only, as the paper states it;
    • the paper's MnM_nMn​ ("there exists {Mn}→0\{M_n\}\to0{Mn​}→0") is made explicit as Mn=C∫∣hn−h∗∣M_n=C\int|h_n-h^*|Mn​=C∫∣hn​−h∗∣, so Eq. (7) is stated for every sample.
  • Remark 3.2 and Appendix B (an integrable envelope in place of boundedness) are not part of this mission.
  • Every real infimum and supremum ranges over a nonempty set of values bounded by CCC in absolute value, so no statement holds through a junk value; a formalization in which the supremum over F\mathcal FF or the box infimum could be vacuous is excluded.
  • The definitions (boxes, Pn\mathcal P_nPn​, the kernel, the estimator, JnJ_nJn​, ddd) live in one definition file. Pn\mathcal P_nPn​ duplicates, with weights 1/n1/n1/n, the distribution set of mission I; the duplication is deliberate because draft missions cannot import each other.
  • Welcome contributions: the kernel density estimator and its strong L1L^1L1 consistency as reusable infrastructure, and any of the deterministic milestones.

Selected references

  • H. Xu, C. Caramanis, S. Mannor, A Distributional Interpretation of Robust Optimization, Mathematics of Operations Research 37(1):95–110, 2012. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.1110.0531
  • L. Devroye, The equivalence of weak, strong and complete convergence in L1L_1L1​ for kernel density estimates, Annals of Statistics 11(3):896–904, 1983.
  • L. Devroye, L. Györfi, Nonparametric Density Estimation: The L1L_1L1​ View, Wiley, 1985.
  • A. J. King, R. J.-B. Wets, Epi-consistency of convex stochastic programs, Stochastics and Stochastic Reports 34(1), 1991 (reference [22] of the paper).
7 thms4 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 4 of 67Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me